Scm605 en sales

433
SCM605 Sales SCM605 Release 470 03.06.2004

Transcript of Scm605 en sales

Page 1: Scm605 en sales

SCM605 Sales SCM605

Release 470 03.06.2004

Page 2: Scm605 en sales

SCM605 Sales ..............................................................................................................................................................................1

Copyright...................................................................................................................................................................................2

Target Group........................................................................................................................................................................3

Course Overview.....................................................................................................................................................................1

Course Goals ........................................................................................................................................................................2

Course Objectives ...............................................................................................................................................................3

Course Content ....................................................................................................................................................................4

Course Overview Diagram................................................................................................................................................5

Main Business Scenario .....................................................................................................................................................6

Introduction...............................................................................................................................................................................1

Introduction: Topic Objectives .........................................................................................................................................2

Introduction: Course Overview Diagram........................................................................................................................3

Introduction: Business Scenario .......................................................................................................................................4

Processes in Sales and Distribution..................................................................................................................................5

Where Does Sales Fit Into the Sales and Dis tribution Process?.................................................................................6

Sales Document Structure..................................................................................................................................................7

Summary ...............................................................................................................................................................................8

Exercise Data Sheet ............................................................................................................................................................9

Introduction - Exercises ...................................................................................................................................................10

Introduction - Solutions....................................................................................................................................................13

Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution..................................................................................................................1

Enterprise Structures: Topic Objectives..........................................................................................................................2

Enterprise Structures: Course Overview Diagram........................................................................................................3

Enterprise Structures: Business Scenario........................................................................................................................4

Enterprise Structures in the SAP R/3 System ................................................................................................................5

How SD Is Integrated in Financial Accounting.............................................................................................................6

Organizational Structures in Sales ...................................................................................................................................7

Sales Organization ..............................................................................................................................................................8

Distribution channel............................................................................................................................................................9

Division...............................................................................................................................................................................10

Sales Area...........................................................................................................................................................................11

Sales Office and Sales Group..........................................................................................................................................12

Plant.....................................................................................................................................................................................13

Delivering Plant.................................................................................................................................................................14

Enterprise Structures: Conclusion..................................................................................................................................15

Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution - Exercises.......................................................................................16

Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution - Solutions.......................................................................................22

Sales Order Processing...........................................................................................................................................................1

Sales Order Processing: Topic Objectives ......................................................................................................................2

Sales Order Processing: Course Overview Diagram ....................................................................................................3

Sales Order Processing: Business Scenario ....................................................................................................................4

Page 3: Scm605 en sales

Overview: Sources for Document Data...........................................................................................................................5

Sales Order Entry - Deriving the Sales Area..................................................................................................................6

Proposing Order Data from Master Data ........................................................................................................................7

Business Partners from the Customer Master................................................................................................................8

Proposing Order Data from the Customer Master.........................................................................................................9

Business Data.....................................................................................................................................................................10

Proposing Plants Automatically .....................................................................................................................................11

Sales Summary ..................................................................................................................................................................12

Overview: Changing Sales Documents.........................................................................................................................13

Blocks..................................................................................................................................................................................14

Rejections...........................................................................................................................................................................15

Change Sold-to Party in Sales Document.....................................................................................................................16

Sales Order Processing: Summary .................................................................................................................................17

Sales Order Processing - Exercises................................................................................................................................18

Sales Order Processing - Solutions................................................................................................................................22

Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types .............................................................................................1

Sales Document Type: Topic Objectives.......................................................................................................................2

Sales Document Type: Course Overview Diagram.....................................................................................................3

Sales Document Type: Business Scenario.....................................................................................................................4

Controlling Business Processes in Sales .........................................................................................................................5

Basic Functions ...................................................................................................................................................................6

Examples of Sales Document Types................................................................................................................................7

Functions in the Sales Document Type...........................................................................................................................8

Order Types Permitted for Sales Areas...........................................................................................................................9

Sales Document Type: Summary ..................................................................................................................................10

Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types - Exercises..................................................................11

Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types - Solutions..................................................................13

Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category ......................................................................................................1

Item Category: Topic Objectives......................................................................................................................................2

Item Category: Course Overview Diagram....................................................................................................................3

Item Category: Business Scenario....................................................................................................................................4

Examples of Item Categories ............................................................................................................................................5

Item Category Functions....................................................................................................................................................6

Controlling the Items in the Sales Document.................................................................................................................7

Subitems ...............................................................................................................................................................................8

Assignment: Item Category to Sales Document Type..................................................................................................9

BOMs: Example: Computer............................................................................................................................................10

Exploding Bills of Material in Sales Documents.........................................................................................................11

Item Category: Summary .................................................................................................................................................12

Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category - Exercises...........................................................................13

-Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category - Solutions .........................................................................18

Controlling Sales Documents with Schedule Line Categories ........................................................................................1

Page 4: Scm605 en sales

Schedule Line Category: Topic Objectives ....................................................................................................................2

Schedule line category: Course Overview Diagram.....................................................................................................3

Schedule Line Category: Business Scenario ..................................................................................................................4

Examples of Schedule Line Categories ...........................................................................................................................5

Schedule Line Category .....................................................................................................................................................6

Controlling Schedule Lines in Sales Documents...........................................................................................................7

Assignment: Schedule Line Category to Item Category ..............................................................................................8

Schedule line category: Summary ....................................................................................................................................9

Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Lines - Exercises......................................................................................10

Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Lines - Solutions......................................................................................13

Data Flow..................................................................................................................................................................................1

Data Flow: Unit Objectives ...............................................................................................................................................2

Data Flow: Course Overview Diagram...........................................................................................................................3

Data Flow: Business Scenario...........................................................................................................................................4

Create with Reference: Dialog..........................................................................................................................................5

Create with Reference: Item Selection (1)......................................................................................................................6

Create with Reference: Item Selection (2)......................................................................................................................7

Create with Reference: Item Selection (3)......................................................................................................................8

Create with Reference: Copy ............................................................................................................................................9

Completion Rule and Reference Status.........................................................................................................................10

Document Flow - List.......................................................................................................................................................11

Copying Control in SD.....................................................................................................................................................12

Copying Control for Sales Documents..........................................................................................................................13

Copying Requirements.....................................................................................................................................................14

Data Flow: Summary ........................................................................................................................................................15

Data Flow - Exercises.......................................................................................................................................................16

Data Flow - Solutions.......................................................................................................................................................19

Special Business Transactions...............................................................................................................................................1

Special Business Transactions: Objectives.....................................................................................................................2

Special Business Transactions: Course Overview Diagram........................................................................................3

Special Business Transactions: Business Scenario .......................................................................................................4

Rush Orders..........................................................................................................................................................................5

Cash Sales.............................................................................................................................................................................6

Consignment Processing....................................................................................................................................................7

Deliveries Free of Charge and Subsequent Deliveries .................................................................................................8

Special Business Transactions: Summary.......................................................................................................................9

Special Business Transactions - Exercises ...................................................................................................................10

Special Business Transactions - Solutions....................................................................................................................14

Incompletion.............................................................................................................................................................................1

Incompletion: Objectives ...................................................................................................................................................2

Incompletion: Course Overview Diagram......................................................................................................................3

Incompleteness: Business Scenario..................................................................................................................................4

Page 5: Scm605 en sales

Incompleteness Log............................................................................................................................................................5

Lists of Incomplete Orders ................................................................................................................................................6

Incomplete Sales Documents ............................................................................................................................................7

Controlling the Incompleteness Log................................................................................................................................8

Status of Incomplete Sales Documents ...........................................................................................................................9

Incompletion: Summary ...................................................................................................................................................10

Incompleteness - Exercises..............................................................................................................................................11

Incompleteness - Solutions..............................................................................................................................................14

Business Partners and Partner Determination.....................................................................................................................1

Partner Determination: Topic Objectives........................................................................................................................2

Partner Determination: Course Overview Diagram......................................................................................................3

Partner Determination: Business Scenario......................................................................................................................4

Business Partners.................................................................................................................................................................5

Partner types.........................................................................................................................................................................6

Partner Functions.................................................................................................................................................................7

Partners in the Sales Process.............................................................................................................................................8

Partner Determination Procedure (1) ...............................................................................................................................9

Partner Determination Procedure (2) .............................................................................................................................10

Partner Determination Procedure (3) .............................................................................................................................11

Partner Determination Procedure (4) .............................................................................................................................12

Customer Master and Account Group...........................................................................................................................13

Permitted Partner Functions per Account Groups.......................................................................................................14

Partner Determination for Sales Documents ................................................................................................................15

Partner Determination: Unit Summary ..........................................................................................................................16

Business Partners and Partner Determination - Exercises .........................................................................................17

Business Partners and Partner Determination - Solutions..........................................................................................20

Outline Agreements.................................................................................................................................................................1

Outline Agreements: Unit Objectives..............................................................................................................................2

Outline Agreements: Course Overview Diagram..........................................................................................................3

Outline Agreements: Business Scenario .........................................................................................................................4

Contracts - Sales Document Types ..................................................................................................................................5

Scheduling Agreements .....................................................................................................................................................6

Quantity Contracts ..............................................................................................................................................................7

Messages Regarding Open Outline Agreements ...........................................................................................................8

Value Contracts ...................................................................................................................................................................9

Valid Materials ..................................................................................................................................................................10

Value Contracts - Release Orders ..................................................................................................................................11

Billing Value Contracts....................................................................................................................................................12

Controlling Value Contracts............................................................................................................................................13

Partners Authorized to Release in Contract..................................................................................................................14

Partners Authorized to Release: Customer List...........................................................................................................15

Contract Data in Sales Documents.................................................................................................................................16

Page 6: Scm605 en sales

Determining Dates ............................................................................................................................................................17

Outline Agreements: Summary ......................................................................................................................................18

Outline Agreements - Exercises .....................................................................................................................................19

Outline Agreements - Solutions......................................................................................................................................22

Material Determination and Listing / Exclusion ................................................................................................................1

Material Determination: Objectives.................................................................................................................................2

Material Determination: Course Overview Diagram....................................................................................................3

Material Determination: Business Scenario ...................................................................................................................4

Determining Materials ........................................................................................................................................................5

Selecting Products Manually.............................................................................................................................................6

Master Data..........................................................................................................................................................................7

Automatic Product Selection.............................................................................................................................................8

Automatic Product Selection - Master Data ...................................................................................................................9

Material Determination - Condition Technique (1) ....................................................................................................10

Material Determination - Condition Technique (2) ....................................................................................................11

Material Determination - Condition Technique (3) ....................................................................................................12

Material Determination - Condition Technique (4) ....................................................................................................13

Material Determination - Condition Technique (5) ....................................................................................................14

Material Determination - Condition Technique (6) ....................................................................................................15

Material Listing and Exclusion.......................................................................................................................................16

Material Determination: Summary.................................................................................................................................17

Material Substitution and Lists Exercises.....................................................................................................................18

Material Substitution and Lists Solutions.....................................................................................................................20

Free Goods................................................................................................................................................................................1

Free Goods: Objectives ......................................................................................................................................................2

Free Goods: Course Overview Diagram.........................................................................................................................3

Free Goods: Business Scenario.........................................................................................................................................4

Exclusive and Inclusive Bonus Quantities (1) ...............................................................................................................5

Exclusive and Inclusive Bonus Quantities (2) ...............................................................................................................6

Free Goods in the Sales Order ..........................................................................................................................................7

Free Goods - Master Data..................................................................................................................................................8

Free Goods - Calculation Rule ..........................................................................................................................................9

Free Goods - Statistics and Controlling ......................................................................................................................10

Free Goods - Condition Technique...............................................................................................................................11

Free Goods: Unit Summary .............................................................................................................................................12

Free Goods - Exercises.....................................................................................................................................................13

Free Goods - Solutions.....................................................................................................................................................15

Introduction: Summary ...........................................................................................................................................................1

Course Objectives ...............................................................................................................................................................2

Recommended Follow-Up Activities ..............................................................................................................................3

LO606 Sales Support ..............................................................................................................................................................1

Contents ................................................................................................................................................................................2

Page 7: Scm605 en sales

Data Used in the Exercises ................................................................................................................................................3

Sales to Employees..................................................................................................................................................................1

Sales to Employees - Business Background.................................................................................................................2

Sales to Employees - Orders ............................................................................................................................................3

Sales to Employees - Delivery .........................................................................................................................................4

Sales to Employees - Billing Document ........................................................................................................................5

Sales to Employees - Tasks ..............................................................................................................................................6

-...............................................................................................................................................................................................7

-.............................................................................................................................................................................................15

Bills of Materials ......................................................................................................................................................................1

Bills of Materials - Business Background....................................................................................................................2

Bills of Materials - Requirements ...................................................................................................................................3

Bills of Materials - Exploding BOMs in Sales Order 1................................................................................................4

Bills of Materials - Exploding BOMs in Sales Order 2................................................................................................5

Bills of Materials - Exploding BOMs in Sales Order 3................................................................................................6

Bills of Materials - Exploding BOMs in Sales Order...................................................................................................7

Bills of Materials - Tasks..................................................................................................................................................8

-...............................................................................................................................................................................................9

-.............................................................................................................................................................................................19

Material Determination...........................................................................................................................................................1

Material Determination - Business Background..........................................................................................................2

Material Determination - Order......................................................................................................................................3

Material Determination - Condition Technique (6) ......................................................................................................4

Material Determination - Customizing .........................................................................................................................5

Material Determination - Substitution Reason.............................................................................................................6

Material Determination - Tasks .......................................................................................................................................7

-...............................................................................................................................................................................................8

-.............................................................................................................................................................................................16

Appendix...................................................................................................................................................................................1

Appendix: Contents ............................................................................................................................................................2

Table Structure for Customers - SD View......................................................................................................................3

Table Structure for Customer Hierarchies ......................................................................................................................4

Table Structure for Materials ............................................................................................................................................5

Table Structure for Customer - Material Information...................................................................................................6

Table Structure for Bills of Material................................................................................................................................7

Table Structure for Sales Activities .................................................................................................................................8

Sales Document Tables - Header .....................................................................................................................................9

Sales Document Tables - Item........................................................................................................................................10

Index Tables .......................................................................................................................................................................11

Customer Matchcodes......................................................................................................................................................12

Contact Partners - Matchcodes .......................................................................................................................................13

Material Matchcodes ........................................................................................................................................................14

Page 8: Scm605 en sales

Bill of Material Matchcodes............................................................................................................................................15

Sales Activity Matchcodes ..............................................................................................................................................16

Sales Order Matchcodes...................................................................................................................................................17

Authorization Objects - Customer Masters ..................................................................................................................18

Authorization Objects - Material Masters.....................................................................................................................19

Authorization Objects - Bills of Materials ....................................................................................................................20

Authorization Objects - Sales Activities .......................................................................................................................21

Authorization Objects - Sales Document Types..........................................................................................................22

Delivery block...................................................................................................................................................................23

Cancellation........................................................................................................................................................................24

Customizing for Cancellations........................................................................................................................................25

Grouping Contracts...........................................................................................................................................................26

Grouping Contracts - Lower-Level Contracts..............................................................................................................27

Referencing Requirements ..............................................................................................................................................28

Frequently Used Menu Paths ..........................................................................................................................................29

Data Used in the Exercises ..............................................................................................................................................35

Service Orders ...................................................................................................................................................................38

Service Orders - Business Background.......................................................................................................................39

Service Orders - Order Before Repairs ........................................................................................................................40

Service Orders - Order After Repairs ..........................................................................................................................41

Service Orders - Delivery ..............................................................................................................................................42

Service Orders - Billing Documents............................................................................................................................43

Service Orders - Tasks ...................................................................................................................................................44

-.............................................................................................................................................................................................45

-.............................................................................................................................................................................................56

Page 9: Scm605 en sales

SAP AG 2003

SCM605 Sales

THE BEST-RUN BUSINESSES RUN SAP

© SAP AG 2003

SCM605Sales

n Release SAP R/3 Enterprise n 2003/Q2 n Material number: 5005 8904

Page 10: Scm605 en sales

SAP AG 2003

Copyright 2003 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice.

All rights reserved.

Copyright

Trademarks: n Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software

components of other software vendors. n Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are registered

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. n IBM®, DB2®, DB2 Universal Database, OS/2®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA, AIX®, S/390®,

AS/400®, OS/390®, OS/400®, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, z/OS, AFP, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere®, Netfinity®, Tivoli®, Informix and Informix® Dynamic ServerTM are trademarks of IBM Corporation in USA and/or other countries.

n ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation. n UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group. n Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®,

VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.

n HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

n JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. n JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for

technology invented and implemented by Netscape. n MarketSet and Enterprise Buyer are jointly owned trademarks of SAP AG and Commerce One. n SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, R/3, mySAP, mySAP.com, and other SAP products and services mentioned

herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies.

Page 11: Scm605 en sales

SAP AG 2003

Target Group

l Participants:

n Project team staff

n Organizers

l Duration: 5 days

Note to Users n These training materials do not represent a self-study program. Your materials are only complete

together with the explanations from your course instructor. Your materials provide space for making your own notes.

Page 12: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG 1999

Course Overview

l Course Goals

l Course Objectives

l Course Content

l Course Overview Diagram

l Main Business Scenario

Contents:

Page 13: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG 1999

Course Goals

This course will provide you with:

l An extensive overview of Sales in the SD application module in the R/3 System

l Detailed explanations of selected examples

l The knowledge needed to set up and use these functions

l An understanding of how to adjust the system to meet your specific requirements in Sales

Page 14: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG 1999

Course Objectives

At the conclusion of this course, you will be able to:

l Integrate sales in the SD process chain

l Configure Customizing so that it represents your specific sales requirements

l Find and use Help within the system

Page 15: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

SAP AG 1999

Course Content

Preface

Sales Workshop

Appendix

Unit 1 Course Overview

Unit 2 Introduction

Unit 3 Enterprise Structuresin Sales

Unit 4 Sales Order Processing

Unit 5 Sales Document Type

Unit 6 Item Category

Unit 7 Schedule Line Category

Unit 8 Data Flow

Unit 9 Special BusinessTransactions

Unit 10 Incompleteness

Unit 11 Partner Determination

Unit 12 Outline Agreements

Unit 13 Material Determination

Unit 14 Free Goods

Unit 15 Summary

Page 16: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 5

SAP AG 1999

Course Overview Diagram

§§

0,--ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special Business

Transactions

9. Incompletion

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

1. Introduction

3. Sales Order Processing

10. Partnerdetermination

XYZ/99XYZ/99M1M1 -?--?-

Page 17: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 6

SAP AG 1999

Main Business Scenario

l The Customer Service department at your company takes orders from your customers.To process the business transaction, you have to enter the transaction as a sales order in the R/3 System.

l Once you have verified in the system that the delivery can take place in accordance with the customer's wishes, you send the customer an order confirmation.

l The further steps in sales are triggered by the sales order and supplied with all the necessary information.

Page 18: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG 1999

Introduction

l Where does sales fit into the sales and distribution process?

l Sales document structure

l Screens and information in the sales document

Unit Contents:

Page 19: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG 1999

Introduction: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

l Explain how Sales links into the sales and distribution chain

l Describe the structure of a sales document

l Locate information stored in the sales document

Page 20: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG 1999

Introduction: Course Overview Diagram

7. Data flow8. Special Business

Transactions

9. Incompletion

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

XYZ/99M1 -?-

11. Outlineagreements§

13. Freegoods

0,--

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

1. Introduction

3. Sales Order Processing

10. Partnerdetermination

ORORLFLFF2F2

Page 21: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

SAP AG 1999

Introduction: Business Scenario

l Your company, IDES Inc., wants to implement the SAP R/3 SD module.

l Sales and distribution processes will also be modeled in the R/3 System in future.

l It is your responsibility to familiarize yourself with the SD functionality in the R/3 System. You are particularly interested in how sales fits into the process chain.

Page 22: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 5

SAP AG 1999

Processes in Sales and Distribution

MMAATTEERRIIAALLSS

MMAANNAAGGEEMMEENNTT

SalesSalesInformationInformation

SystemSystem

USD

SalessupportSalessupport

SalesSales

Shipping Shipping

BillingBilling

Financial accountingFinancial accounting

Outbound delivery

Debit memo Credit memoInvoice

Free-of-chargedelivery Order

Contract

Sched. agt

Sales activity

Inquiry

Quotation

Shipment

ReturnsFree-of-charge

subsequent delivery

n Every sales activity that you undertake in R/3 is recorded with a sales document. n You can represent different business processes in Sales, Shipping and Billing with specifically

designed document types: � Sales document types (for example inquiries, quotations, standard orders) � Delivery types (for example deliveries, return deliveries) � Billing document types (for example, invoices, credit memos, debit memos)

n Each document is identified with a unique document number. Matchcodes help you search for documents.

n Each document is assigned an overall status that reflects its processing status. The overall status depends on the different status values in the document. These different values reflect the processing status of the different steps of the sales activity.

Page 23: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 6

SAP AG 1999

• Follows up activities from sales support• Enters orders• Determines prices• Decides on delivery requirements• Decides on requirements for creating

invoices• Updates status and document flow• Updates the Sales Information System• Transfers requirements

Where Does Sales Fit Into the Sales and Distribution Process?

Page 24: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 7

SAP AG 1999

Item 10

Business dataConditionsPartnersTextsPurchase order dataetc.

Business data Conditions TextsPartnersetc.

SalesShippingProcurement

Header

Schedule line 1

Item 20Schedule line 1

Schedule line 2

Sales Document Structure

n Each business process in the SAP System is represented as a document. For example, a sales document is created during sales order processing.

n The sales document consists of a document header and as many items as required. Each item can in turn contain as many schedule lines as needed.

n The document header contains general data and default values that are valid for the whole document. n The document items contain data about the goods and services ordered by the customer. This

includes material numbers, descriptions, prices and terms of delivery and payment. n Data for shipping and procurement is located in schedule lines. Because the delivery deadline and

order quantity are found in schedule lines, each line item with delivery requirements must contain at least one schedule line.

Page 25: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 8

SAP AG 1999

Summary

You are now able to:

l Explain how Sales links into the sales and distribution chain

l Describe the structure of a sales document

l Locate information stored in the sales document

Page 26: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 9

Exercise Data Sheet

Key to Icons in Exercises and Solutions

Exercises

Solutions

Course Objectives

Business Scenario

Hints and Tips

Warning or Caution

The data on which the exercises are based was generated as a copy of the data from the IDES system. This enables you to run through the exercises again in an IDES system.

To do this, we recommend creating your own copies of the IDES data. For information on which data to use as a copy template, please refer to the Appendix.

Page 27: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 10

Introduction - Exercises

Unit: Introduction

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Find important information in the sales order screens

• Generate a subsequent document and display the document flow

You are working in the order entry department and answer a telephone inquiry about a computer monitor. Based on this inquiry, you check your product line and create a quotation. Your customer places an order based on this quotation.

1-1 Your customer, T-S62A##, is interested in ordering your material T-ATA##.

1-1-1 Enter the inquiry with purchase order number ##LO605-IN01. Your customer needs 20 units and wants delivery in two weeks.

Inquiry number: ___________________________________

When you enter the inquiry, remember to take the requested delivery date into account.

1-1-2 Enter a corresponding quotation with reference to the inquiry (assign purchase order number ##LO605-OT01). Limit the validity of your quotation to one month.

Quotation number: __________________________________

Make sure to create with reference to the inquiry. To do this, choose Create with reference.

1-1-3 After checking the quotation, your customer decides to order 5 units of the product. The requested delivery date is two weeks from today. Enter the

Page 28: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 11

standard order with purchase order ##LO605-OR01.

Order number: ___________________________________

Make sure to create with reference to the quotation. To do this, choose Create with reference.

1-1-4 Use the document flow from the quotation to see an overview of this sales process. What is the overall processing status of each document?

Inquiry: _________________________________ Quotation: _________________________________ Order: _________________________________

1-1-5 Optional

After checking the product, your customer decides to order the remaining 15 units. The requested delivery date is two weeks from today. Create another order with reference to your quotation. It should have purchase order number ##LO605-OR02.

1-1-6 Optional

Review the sales process by viewing document flow for the quotation. What is the overall processing status of each document now?

Inquiry: _________________________________ Quotation: _________________________________ Order: _________________________________ Order: _________________________________

Page 29: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 12

1-2 You want to collect detailed information about the business transaction. To do this, display the inquiry, bring up document flow, and from there navigate into different documents as needed.

1-2-1 What is the unit price of the monitor in one of the orders?

Material price per unit (PR00): ____________________________________

1-2-2 Which of your sales offices is responsible for this sale?

Sales office: ____________________________________

1-2-3 What is the name of the sales employee responsible for the sale?

Name: ____________________________________

1-2-4 Which division does your product belong to and which material pricing group has it been assigned to?

Division: ____________________________________

Material pricing group: ____________________________________

1-2-5 Which plant, shipping point and route will be used to deliver the goods?

Plant: ____________________________________

Shipping point: ____________________________________

Route: ____________________________________

1-2-6 What are the terms of delivery (Incoterms) and payment for your customer?

Incoterms: ____________________________________

Payment terms: ____________________________________

1-2-7 What date has the delivery been confirmed for?

Confirmed delivery date: ____________________________________

Page 30: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 13

Introduction - Solutions

Unit: Introduction

1-1 Process the business transaction.

1-1-1 Create the inquiry and save the document.

à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Inquiry à Create

Inquiry type: AF Customer: T-S62A## Purchase order number: ##LO605-IN01

Req. delivery date: Two weeks from today Material: T-ATA## (20 units)

Save the document.

1-1-2 Create the quotation with a reference to the inquiry.

à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Quotation à Create

Quotation type: OR

Choose Create with reference.

Inquiry number: From the above inquiry

Choose Copy.

Validity: From Today to one month from today Purchase order number: ##LO605-OT01

Save the document.

1-1-3 Create the order with reference to the quotation.

à Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Order à Create

Order type: OR

Choose Create with reference.

Quotation number: From the above quotation Requested delivery date: Two weeks from today

Choose Selection list.

Reduce the quantity.

Choose Copy.

PO number: ##LO605-OR01

Save the document.

Page 31: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 14

1-1-4 Display the document flow for the quotation.

à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Quotation à Display

Choose Display document flow.

Inquiry: Completed

Quotation: Being processed

Order: Open

1-1-5 Optional

Create another order with reference to the quotation.

à Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Order à Create

Order type: OR

Choose Create with reference.

Quotation number: From the above quotation Requested delivery date: Two weeks from today

Choose Copy.

PO number: ##LO605-OR02

Save the document.

1-1-6 Optional

Display the document flow for the quotation.

à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Quotation à Display

Choose Display document flow.

Inquiry: Completed

Quotation: Completed

Order: Open

Order: Open

Page 32: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 15

1-2 Find the required information in the documents.

1-2-1 Display the document flow for the Inquiry. Determine the unit price in the Conditions item screen.

à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Inquiry à Display

Choose Display document flow.

Select an order and choose Display document.

Select the item and choose Item conditions

Unit price (PR00): 2.299,-

1-2-2 Choose à Goto à Header and then Sales.

Sales office: 1000 Frankfurt office

1-2-3 Choose tab page Partners.

Sales employee: 1701 Melanie Mayer

1-2-4 Select the item, choose Display Item Details and then choose Sales B.

Division: 07 High Tech Material pricing group: Standard parts

1-2-5 Choose Shipping.

Plant: 1200 Dresden Shipping point: 1200 Shipping point Dresden Route: R00130 Dresden - Frankfurt

1-2-6 Choose Billing.

Incoterms: CFR Mainz Payment terms: ZB01 14 days 3%, 30/2%, 45 net

1-2-7 Choose Schedule lines.

Confirmed delivery date: Date of line with the confirmed quantity

Page 33: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG 1999

Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution

Unit Contents:

l Organizational units in the SAP R/3 System

l Organizational Structures in Sales

l Including Sales in the enterprise organizational structure

Page 34: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG 1999

Enterprise Structures: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

l Use organizational units in the SAP R/3 System to model the different areas at your company

l Set up enterprise structures by assigning them to organizational units

l Adjust the organizational structures to meet the legal and business requirements of your company

Page 35: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG 1999

Enterprise Structures: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

0,--ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special business

transactions

9. Incomp-leteness

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

1. Introduction

3. Sales Order Processing

10. Partnerdetermination

Page 36: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

SAP AG 1999

Enterprise Structures: Business Scenario

l Your company, IDES Inc., has been using the SAP R/3 SD module successfully for years

l Company management has now decided to expand the company's sales activities. In the future, customers should also be able to place orders at trade fairs

l It must be possible to control and evaluate the new sales activities separately from all existing activities

l Your responsibility is to expand the enterprise structure in sales accordingly

Page 37: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 5

SAP AG 1999

Enterprise Structures in the SAP R/3 System

Enterprise structuresEnterprise Enterprise structuresstructures

Cost accountingCost accounting

External logisticsExternal logistics

AccountingAccounting

Internal logistics(materials plan./production)

Internal logistics(materials plan./production)

Inventory managementInventory management

Organizational units in the SAP system

Organizational units in the Organizational units in the SAP systemSAP system

Sales organizationsSales organizations Purchasing organizationsPurchasing organizations

Company codesCompany codes

Valuation areasValuation areas

Storage locations/Batches/Special stocksStorage locations/Batches/Special stocks

PlantsPlants

CompanyCompany

Controlling areasControlling areas

Objectives of the organizational structures in R/3 are to: n Achieve flexibility in representing complex corporate structures n Adapt to changes in the corporate structure n Distinguish between views in logistics (sales and distribution, purchasing, etc.), cost accounting and

financial accounting n Process data across company codes

Page 38: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 6

SAP AG 1999

How SD Is Integrated in Financial Accounting

Client

Company code1000

1000

2000

3000

4000

Company code2000

1000

2000

Businessarea 4000

n All of the organizational units within a client are subject to one business control. Therefore, a client can be considered to be a synonym for the group.

n A client is a self-contained technical unit. General data and tables that are used for several organizational structures are stored at this level.

n You can use the company code and business area to represent a group from a financial accounting viewpoint.

n You can create several company codes for every client, in order to carry out financial accounting for several independent companies simultaneously. At least one company code must be created, however.

n Each company code represents an independent accounting unit. Several company codes can use the same chart of accounts.

n A business area is a separate business unit for which cross-company code internal reporting can be carried out. Business areas are not limited by company codes. For this reason, the business areas in all company codes must have the same description. Using this organizational unit is optional.

n You will use business areas if you if you want to calculate profit and loss statements independently of the company code. In the case of postings made from sales and distribution, the business area can be derived automatically.

Page 39: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 7

SAP AG 2003

Organizational Structures in Sales

Sales Organization

Distribution Channel

Division

Sales Area

10001000

Sales Office

Sales Group

n A variety of organizational units are available for modelling sales business transactions. In the sales area, the following organizational structures can be defined and used to model and structure the sales structures:

­ Sales organization ­ Distribution channel ­ Division ­ Sales area ­ Sales office ­ Sales group

Other organizational units in SD, such as the shipping point and the transportation planning point, are covered in other SD courses.

Page 40: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 8

SAP AG 1999

Sales Organization

Client

Company code1000

SlOrg 1000

SlOrg 1020 SlOrg 2000

Company code2000

n A sales organization represents the organizational structures in sales and distribution. Each sales organization represents a selling unit as a legal entity. It is, for example, responsible for product liability and other customer rights of recourse. You can use sales organizations to subdivide markets into regions. Each business transaction is processed within a sales organization.

n A sales organization is assigned to exactly one company code. n A sales organization is assigned to one or more plants. n Each sales organization has its own master data, for example, its own customer and material master

data as well as condition records.

Page 41: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 9

SAP AG 1999

Distribution channel

12 Resale

SlOrg 1000

10 End customer

Distribution channel

n You can use different distribution channels in Sales and Distribution to provide the market with the best possible service. Distribution channels provide a general structure for distributing goods. Wholesale trade, sales to industrial customers or direct sales from a plant are typical examples of distribution channels.

n Distribution channels can be set up according to your company's market strategy or internal organization.

n Customers can be served through one or more distribution channels within a sales organization. n In addition, you can vary the master data relevant to sales, such as customer master data, sales master

data, prices, and surcharges/discounts, for each sales organization and distribution channel.

Page 42: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 10

SAP AG 1999

Division

SlOrg 1000

Division

07 High Tech02 Motorcycles

n A broad product range can be divided into divisions. In the SAP system, you can also define a division-specific sales structure.

n You can make customer-specific agreements for each division, for example regarding partial deliveries or pricing. Within a division, you can carry out statistical analyses or devise your own marketing strategies.

Page 43: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 11

SAP AG 2003

Sales Area

Sales Org.Frankfurt

Sales Org.London

Distribution ChannelEnd Customer

Distribution ChannelResale

DivisionMotorcycles

DivisionHigh Tech

DivisionMotorcycles

DivisionMotorcycles

DivisionHigh Tech

n A sales area is a combination of sales organization, distribution channel and division. n Sales documents, delivery documents, and billing documents are always assigned to a sales area.

Every sales process always takes place in a specific sales area. n The relevant master data can usually be maintained explicitly for each sales area, for example:

­ Sales-relevant customer master data ­ Sales-relevant material master data (the division is a general field of the material master; as a

result, a material can only be assigned to one division.) ­ Conditions (prices, discounts/surcharges)

n You can carry out analyses within a sales area, for example, by evaluating the sales volume. n You should try to keep the organizational structure of a sales area as simple as possible .

Page 44: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 12

SAP AG 2003

Sales Office and Sales Group

Sales-personSales-person

Sales GroupSales Group

Sales OfficeSales Office

10001000

Sales Area

Sales OfficeNorthern Region

Group110

Cole

Group111

Brown

Group115

Bays

Sales OfficeSouthern Region

Group100

Young Wise

Group101

Miller Lopez

n Sales office � Geographical aspects of the organizational structures in business development and sales are

defined using sales offices. A sales office can be viewed as an actual office or perhaps a territory or region. Sales offices can be assigned to multiple sales areas. If you enter a sales order for a sales office within a particular sales area, the sales office must be permitted for that sales area.

n Sales group � Employees of a sales office can be assigned to sales groups defined for each division or

distribution channel. Sales groups are assigned to sales offices. n Salesperson � A sales group consists of a certain number of salespersons. A salesperson is assigned to a sales

office and group in the sales employee master record. Thereafter you can select this personnel master record in the partner screen of a sales document.

n You can carry out sales analyses on the different internal organization levels.

Page 45: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 13

SAP AG 1999

Plant

Client

Company code1000

Plant . . .

Company code3000

Plant . . .

Plant 1200

Plant 1000

Plant 3100

Plant 3000

n Materials management is primarily concerned with the flow of materials within a company. Production facilities and locations for storing stock must therefore be defined in the system. The terms used in the system for these entities are plant and storage location. Material stocks can be described in detail at the level of different storage locations within a plant.

n A plant can either be a location for production and material requirements planning (MRP) or it may simply represent one or more material stock locations in close proximity to one another.

n Each plant is assigned to a unique company code. n For a plant to deliver goods to customers, it must be configured appropriately as a delivering plant in

SD customizing. During the sales process, the delivering plants are first used to verify the stocks, and later to supply the goods the customer has ordered.

Page 46: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 14

SAP AG 2003

Delivering Plant

Client

Company Code1000

Company Code3000

Plant 1100 Plant 1400 Plant 1200

000102

100012

220010

Plant 2200

n The plants from which the Sales department delivers the materials ordered (delivering plants) must be assigned to a sales organization and a distribution channel (distribution chain) in Customizing.

n By making the plant dependent on the distribution channel, you can differentiate further between plants within a sales organization for sales. This would allow the distribution channel "direct sales" for certain plants in a sales organization but not for others.

n One plant can be assigned to several distribution chains as the delivering plant. It can also be assigned to several sales organizations.

n It is also possible for the delivering plant of a distribution chain to belong to a different independent company in the corporate group (that is, the plant belongs to a different company code to the sales organization). This is called cross-company Sales. This topic is discussed in detail in training course LO925 Cross-Application Business Processes in SD and MM.

Page 47: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 15

SAP AG 1999

Enterprise Structures: Conclusion

You are now able to:

l Use organizational units in the SAP R/3 System to model the different areas at your company

l Set up enterprise structures by assigning them to organizational units

l Adjust the organizational structures to meet the legal and business requirements of your company

Page 48: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 16

Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution - Exercises

Unit: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Describe the structure of the IDES company for sales and distribution

• Set up your own enterprise structures for sales and distribution in the SAP System

You have joined the project team that is implementing the SAP System at your company.

As the employee responsible for sales, you need to familiarize yourself with the structure that has already been created and verify the settings.

You will expand the existing enterprise structure for your sales organization to include the new distribution channel e-Sales.

The required settings are located in the Implementation Guide (IMG) under the IMG node for Enterprise Structure. You can find some of the organizational data in Sales and Distribution and other data in the Financial Accounting and Logistics - General areas.

Page 49: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 17

DATA SHEET

Enterprise Structures Organizational units Key Description

Sales organization 1000

Distribution channel • Final customer sales

• Service

Division Cross-division

Sales office •

Sales group •

Company code

Plant • 1200

Page 50: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 18

1-1 The project team has already modeled your company’s organizational structure in the R/3 System. Familiarize yourself with the organizational units that have been set up to model your company’s organizational structure. Complete the Enterprise Structures data sheet as appropriate.

1-1-1 What is the description of your sales organization 1000? Which currency is used to update the statistics? What is the address?

Description: _________________________________ Statistics currency: Name: _________________________________ Address: _________________________________ _________________________________

1-1-2 Which distribution channels have been defined for Final customer sale and Service?

Distr. channel: _________________________________ Distribution channel: _________________________________

1-1-3 Which division has been created for cross-division sales?

Division: _________________________________

Page 51: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 19

1-2 Familiarize yourself with the enterprise structures that are relevant for sales that have been configured as organizational structures. Complete the Enterprise Structures data sheet as appropriate.

1-2-1 The organizational units determined above have been used to configure various sales areas for your sales organization 1000. Which sales areas have been defined? Sales organization Distribution

channel Division

Sales area 1000 Sales area 1000

1-2-2 Determine the sales offices responsible for managing sales in sales area 1000 / 10 / 00.

Sales office: _________________________________ Sales office: _________________________________ Sales office: _________________________________

1-2-3 Add some examples of the sales groups assigned to the sales offices listed above.

Office: _______________ Sales group: __________________ Sales group: __________________

Office: _______________ Sales group: __________________ Sales group: __________________

1-2-4 Which company code does your sales organization belong to?

Company code: _________________________________

Which currency is defined for this company code?

Currency: _________________________________

Page 52: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 20

1-2-5 Enter the delivering plants that are assigned to sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10 in your data sheet.

Delivering plant: _________________________________ Delivering plant: _________________________________ Delivering plant: _________________________________ Delivering plant: _________________________________

2-1 Optional

To meet their goal of establishing new, modern sales possibilities, your management board has approved a project for establishing eSales as a new sales channel at your company. Management wants to be able to track the sales and revenues from these transactions separately, and pricing procedures that are different from all other sales processes must be possible.

Configure the new organizational units you need.

2-1-1 Define a new distribution channel for e-sales.

Please use the Define distribution channel function, NOT Copy, delete, check distribution channel.

Background:

The Define distribution channel function (only) creates a new distribution channel. The much more powerful function Copy, delete, check distribution channel allows you to copy all of the distribution channel-specific settings from the template. You can also perform this synchronization later. This function is extremely useful and efficient in projects. In this course, however, you are responsible for performing the corresponding Customizing steps yourself.

Distr. channel: Y = 70 + ## (for group 19, for example: Y = 70 + 19 = 89) Description: eSales ##

2-1-2 An independent staff is being trained to process the orders received through e-Sales. Organizationally, these employees will be grouped together in a sales office. Set up the new sales office Ze## eOffice ## for this group. Use sales office 1000 as a template.

Page 53: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 21

2-2 Optional

Enhance the existing sales organization structures by integrating new organizational units.

2-2-1 Assign the new distribution channel to your sales organization 1000.

2-2-2 Build new sales areas with your sales organization, Z000, the new distribution channel, and divisions 00, 01, and 07.

2-2-3 Make sure that deliveries for orders from the new sales areas can take place at your distribution centers at the Hamburg, Dresden, and Stuttgart plants.

2-2-4 Configure Customizing so that orders entered for your new sales area, Z000 / Y / 00, can be assigned to your new sales office ZE## eOffice ## as the responsible internal organizational unit.

Page 54: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 22

Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution - Solutions

Unit: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution

DATA SHEET

Enterprise Structures Organizational units Key Description

Sales organization 1000 Germany Frankfurt

Distribution channel • 10 Final customer sales

• 14 Service

Division 00 Cross-division

Sales office • 1000 Office Hamburg

• 1010 Office Frankfurt

• 1030 Office Stuttgart

Sales group (example) • 1000 / 100 Gr. F1 Mr. Anton

• 1000 / 101 Gr. F2 Mr. Mayer

• 1010 / 110 Gr. H1 Mr. Thomas

• 1030 / 130 Gr. S1 Ms. Chmiel

Company code 1000 IDES AG 1000

Plant • 1200

• 1000

• 1100

• 1300

Dresden

Hamburg

Berlin

Frankfurt

Page 55: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 23

1-1 Go to the SAP Reference IMG and navigate to the definition of the organizational units. Complete the Enterprise Structures data sheet as appropriate.

à Tools à Accelerated SAP à Customizing à Edit Project

Choose SAP Reference IMG

à Enterprise structure à Definition

1-1-1 Find the definition of sales organization 1000.

à Sales and Distribution à Define, copy, delete, check sales organization . .

Choose Define Sales Organization.

Description: Germany Frankfurt Statistics currency: Euro

Choose Address.

Name: IDES Deutschland - Frankfurt Address: Friedrich-Naumann-Straße 16 60486 Frankfurt/M

1-1-2 Find the description of the distribution channels.

à Sales and Distribution à Define, copy, delete, check distribution channel

Choose Define distribution channel.

Distr. channel: 10 Final customer sale Distribution channel: 14 Service

1-1-3 Find the description of the division.

à Logistics – General à Define, copy, delete, check division

Choose Define division.

Division: 00 Cross-division

Page 56: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 24

1-2 Navigate to the assignment of the organizational units to enterprise structures. Complete the Enterprise Structures data sheet as appropriate.

à Enterprise structure à Assignment

1-2-1 Go to the assignment of sales areas.

à Sales and Distribution à Set up sales area Sales organization Distribution

channel Division

Sales area 1000 10 00 Sales area 1000 14 00

1-2-2 Go to the assignment of sales offices.

à Sales and Distribution à Assign sales office to sales area

Sales office: 1000 Office Frankfurt Sales office: 1010 Office Hamburg Sales office: 1030 Office Stuttgart

1-2-3 Go to the assignment of sales groups.

à Sales and Distribution à Assign sales group to sales office

Office: 1000 Sales group: 100 Gr. F1 Mr. Anton Sales group: 101 Gr. F2 Mr. Mayer Sales group: 103 Gr. F3 Mr. Ludwig

Office: 1010 Sales group: 110 Gr. H1 Mr. Thomas Sales group: Gr. H2 Mr. Thiel

Office: 1030 Sales group: 130 Gr. S1 Ms. Chmiel Sales group: 131 Gr. S2 Mr. Kaysers

1-2-4 Go to the assignment of the company codes.

à Sales and Distribution à Assign sales organization to company code

Company code: 1000 IDES AG

Go to the definition of the company codes.

à Enterprise structure à Definition à Financial Accounting à Define, copy, delete, check company code . .

Choose Edit company code data.

Currency: Euro

1-2-5 Go to the assignment of plants in Sales and Distribution.

Page 57: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 25

à Enterprise structure à Assignment à Sales and Distribution à Assign sales organization - distribution channel - plant

Delivering plant: 1000 Hamburg Delivering plant: 1100 Berlin Delivering plant: 1200 Dresden Delivering plant: 1300 Frankfurt

2-1 Optional

Create new organizational units for Sales and Distribution.

2-1-1 Create a new distribution channel Y eSales ## (Y=70 + ##).

à Enterprise structure à Definition à Sales and Distribution à Define, copy, delete, check distribution channel

Choose Define distribution channel .

Distr. channel: Y = 70 + ## (for group 19, for example: Y = 70 + 19 = 89) Description: eSales ##

2-1-2 Set up the new sales office Ze## eOffice ##.

à Sales and Distribution à Maintain sales office

Select sales office 1000 and choose Copy as...

2-2 Optional

Assign the new organizational units to the existing structure.

2-2-1 Assign the new distribution channel to your sales organization 1000.

à Enterprise structure à Assignment à Sales and Distribution à Assign distribution channel to sales organization

2-2-2 Set up the new sales areas.

à Sales and Distribution à Set up sales area

2-2-3 Assign delivering plants to the new distribution chain.

à Sales and Distribution à Assign sales organization - distribution channel - plant

2-2-4 Assign your new sales office Ze## eOffice ## to a sales area.

Page 58: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 26

à Sales and Distribution à Assign sales office to sales area

Page 59: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG 1999

Sales Order Processing

l Processing sales orders

l Ways of creating sales orders

l Help creating sales orders

Unit Contents:

Page 60: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG 1999

Sales Order Processing: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

l Find and use the tools and help for entering and processing sales orders

l Determine the origin of document data from various sources, like the material master, the customer master, or customizing

Page 61: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG 1999

Sales Order Processing: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

0.00ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special business

transactions

9. Incomp-leteness

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

1. Introduction

3. Sales order processing

10. Partnerdetermination

Page 62: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

SAP AG 1999

Sales Order Processing: Business Scenario

l Your company, IDES Inc., has been using the SAP R/3 SD module successfully for years.

l You now want to further optimize the processes of entering and processing sales orders.

l To do this, you want to extract the document data as default values and fixed values from the master data and other sources.

l You want to take full advantage of the aids and tools that are available for creating documents.

l It is your responsibility to familiarize yourself with the techniques for creating and processing documents in the R/3 System.

Page 63: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 5

SAP AG 1999

Overview: Sources for Document Data

...

...

...

IMGCustomizing

Master data Customer masterMaterial masterConditions. . .

Existingdocumentdata

Information sources are:

Hard-codedcontrols

form XY_001.sy-subrc = 4.check: FeldX ne FeldY.sy-subrc = 0.

endform.ProgramProgram

ABAP/4 Editor

Order

Example: Sales document type: delivery block, shipping condition

e.g., determination of shipping point

Example: The delivering plant at item level as the basis for determining the shipping point

Example: Customer master: Plant, shipping condition

Example: Material master: Plant, loading group

Example: Weighting the different sources of information during plant determination

During data input for sales documents, the system supports you by analyzing various sources of information. The aim is to make creating documents easier by using default values or fixed reference data. Possible sources of information are:

n Master data: The system reads the master data defined for a customer, a material, or a pricing condition. For example, the specific terms of payment for a customer can be found. The sales information from a material master can serve as the source of the delivering plant.

n Existing document data: Document data that has already been entered or dete rmined automatically by the system can be used to enter additional documents data. For example, the delivering plant is used - along with other information - to determine the shipping point.

n Customizing: Default values for creating documents can be defined in Customizing. For example, you can set a default value for the delivery date or configure a delivery or billing block in the sales document type. You can also define strategies in Customizing for determining document information based on combinations of several criteria (for example: determining the shipping point through a combination of delivering plant, loading group, and shipping condition).

n Hard-coded controls: Hard-coded controls can be used to weight the different sources of information (example: proposing plants automatically).

Page 64: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 6

SAP AG 1999

Sales Order Entry - Deriving the Sales Area

Order

Sold-to party:C1 Smith Inc.

Sales area:1000 10 00

Item:M1 Material 1

Ship-to party:S1 Smith Inc.

Customer master

Smith Inc.C1

n Each sales order is assigned to a unique sales area (sales organization, distribution channel, division). n When you enter a sales order you don't need to specify the sales area immediately. If you don't, the

system automatically derives the sales area from the sold-to party. n If there is master data for the sold-to party in several sales areas, a selection screen appears where

you can choose the sales area you require. Note: You can also create the master record for a new sold-to party from within the document creation

transaction.

Page 65: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 7

SAP AG 1999

Proposing Order Data from Master Data

Customer master

Business partnersPricingTax determinationDelivery schedulingPaymentsOutput

Material master

Pricing Tax determinationWeights / volumesAvailability checksDelivery scheduling Delivery controlsPlants

Master data

Conditions

Master data

OutputMaster data

Texts

Master data

Customer-material info

Item

10

20

30

Material

M1

M2

M3

Quantity

10

20

15

Order

Sold-to party: C1Ship-to party: S1

n It is advisable to store as much data as possible in master records in the R/3 System. This will save you time during order entry and help you to avoid incorrect entries.

n You can enter different types of master data in the R/3 System, such as information on business partners, materials, customer/material, item proposals, bills of material, prices, discounts and rebates, taxes, freight, output and texts. . The system will frequently access this data during order processing.

n In the order overview, you can create items for the ordering party by entering customer-specific material numbers.

Page 66: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 8

SAP AG 1999

Business Partners from the Customer Master

Bill-to party Payer

Ship-to partySold-to party

Customer master

n The essential business partners for a sales transaction are the sold-to party, ship-to party, payer and bill-to party. These business partners play various roles (called partner functions) in the business process.

n You can maintain a customer master record for each partner. There is a suitable entry screen for each type of business partner.

n When you enter a sales document, you can also enter the ship-to party instead of the sold-to party. The system then determines the sold-to party from the ship-to party. � If there is exactly one sold-to party for the ship-to party, the system can do this automatically. � If there are several possible sold-to parties for the ship-to party, the system displays a selection

screen with the possible alternatives. � If a sold-to party cannot be determined, the system issues an error message in the status bar. � A message also tells you if you entered a ship-to party in the sold-to party field inadvertently. The

system then continues to process the data as if you had entered the ship-to party in the ship-to party field.

Page 67: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 9

SAP AG 1999

Proposing Order Data from the Customer Master

Terms of payment Terms of payment Credit limit checkCredit limit check

OrderSold-to party:

Ship-to party:

Payer:

Bill-to party:

Item

.

.

Material

.

.

Quantity

.

.

Customer master C1

PricingPricingIncotermsIncoterms

Shipping conditionsShipping conditions

Customer master S1

ShipShip--to addressto addressGoods receiving hoursGoods receiving hoursTaxTax

Customer master E1

Billing address

Customer master R1

C1

S1

R1

E1

n The business data in a sales document is taken from the master data records for the different business partners.

n Because the ship-to party can be in a different place to the sold-to party, the delivery address and tax information are taken from the ship-to party's master record.

n Because the payer is responsible for paying your receivables, the payment conditions in the document come from the payer's master record.

n The bill-to party contains the address to which the invoice should be sent. This address could be different from that of the payer.

Page 68: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 10

SAP AG 1999

Business Data

Order 2HEADERPayment cond.: ZB01Incoterms : FOB

Order 1

Different data at itemlevel not possible

Changes possible, as separatebusiness data is allowed atitem level

HEADERPayment cond.: ZB01Incoterms: FOB

Copy CopyItem 10Payment cond.: ZB01Incoterms: FOB

Item 20Payment cond.: ZB01Incoterms: FOB

Item 10Payment cond.: ZB01Incoterms: FOB

Item 20Payment cond.: ZB01

ZB02Incoterms: FOB EXW

n You can define business data (such as payment conditions, Incoterms) at the document header or for each item.

n You can decide in Customizing for the item category whether the business data at item level can differ to the business data at header level. You define this option separately for each item category. This allows you to create documents containing both items in which the business data must be identical to the sales document header and items that allow different business data.

Page 69: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 11

SAP AG 1999

Proposing Plants Automatically

Delivering plant: 1100

Sold-to party: C2Ship-to party: S1

Item Material Quantity Plant10 M1 10 110020 M2 10 1100

Sold-to party: C3Ship-to party: S2

Item Material Quantity Plant10 M1 10 110020 M2 10 1200

Customer-material infoC1 M1 Cust.mat. PC-100

Sold-to party: C1Ship-to party: S1

Customer materialPC-100

Item

10

Quantity

10

Plant

1400

Material master M1

Customer master S1

Delivering plant: 1400

Delivering plant: 1000

Material master M2

Delivering plant: 1200

n The plant is an integral part of Logistics. It assumes the role of a delivering plant in SD. n When you enter an item to be delivered, the R/3 System attempts to determine a delivering plant

automatically from the master data. If the search is successful, the results are copied to the document item. You can change this plant manually.

n During its search, the system checks several master data records: � First, it checks whether it can propose a delivering plant from an entry in the customer-material

info record. � If the customer-material info record doesn't contain a plant, or if there aren't any customer-material

info records, the system checks the customer master record for the ship-to party. � If this search is unsuccessful, the delivering plant is determined from the material master record.

If there isn't a plant in the material master record, the system will be unable to determine a valid plant. And if the system is unable to determine a valid plant, it cannot determine any other document data, either. For example, it would not be possible to automatically determine the shipping point. Furthermore, no availability check is possible, and no delivery can be created.

Note: If necessary, you can use a USEREXIT to enhance the standard system.

Page 70: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 12

SAP AG 1999

Sales Summary

Sales Summary for Customer 5264

Address

IDES Inc.Neurottstr. 16D-69190 Walldorf

Quick info

Last order 5638Max. credit limit used 68%Orders with billing block 2

Key figures

Annual sales 200 000 000 UNIEmployees 604 Legal status Limited liability company

. . .

Info blocks

l Address

l Key figures

l Quick info

l Contact persons

l Last SD documents

l Document key figures

l Pricing

l . . .

n The sales summary helps to create documents by displaying a variety of relevant information about the customer. This information is available through a pushbutton at any time during document processing.

n The information in the sales summary is grouped into info blocks on various topics. You can configure the info block views according to topic yourself in Customizing.

Page 71: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 13

SAP AG 2003

Overview: Changing Sales Documents

Fast Changes in Document

Order

Concurrent change to several items

Fast Changes in Several Documents

Order

Plant 20001200

Order

Plant 20001200

Order

Plant 20001200

Order

Plant 20001200

Changes using document list

Item 10Item 20. . .

Mat-12Mat-10. . .

Plant 1200Plant 1200. . . . . .

20002000. . .

n Different options are available for changing document data: n Fast change in document: The fast change function allows you to change several - or all - items of

a document at the same time (for example: changing the delivering plant or delivery date, settings blocks, rejections)

n Changing several documents: You can use the document list to change the plant, currency, materials, and pricing in several documents at the same time. The new mass change tool for documents in Release 4.6 supports comprehensive changes to the selected sales documents.

Page 72: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 14

SAP AG 1999

Blocks

OrderBlocks

Header Delivery block/billing block

Item 10 Billing block

Item 20Sched. line 1Sched. line 2 Deliv. block

User sets and removes blocks

Defining blocks in Customizing

...

...

...

IMG

n In sales orders, you can block the transactions: � For shipping � For billing

n You can set a billing block in the document header and in the individual items. You can customize the delivery block to configure the detailed effects of that block in shipping processing. For example, you can generally prevent the creation of a delivery, or allow processing of the delivery and picking but block the goods issue, and so on (see Appendix).

n You can set a billing block in the document header and in the individual items. n You can enter reasons for rejection for one or more items. In copying control you can stop this item

from being copied into subsequent documents. n The "Fast change" function enables you to simultaneously block all the items that you have selected

in the document.

Page 73: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 15

SAP AG 2003

Rejections

Item 20 M3 30 PC

Item 10 M1 10 PC

Order

Quotation

Item 10 M1 10 PC

Item 20 M2 20 PCReason for rejection: Too expensive

Item 30 M3 30 PC

Sold-To Party: C1

Sold-To Party: C1

x

n You can enter a reason for rejection for one or several items. You can create a suitable copying requirement in copying control to prevent these items from being copied into subsequent documents.

n For example, if a customer doesn't want some of the items in a quotation, you can assign a reason for rejection to those items. This gives the items the status completed. The business transaction can thus be concluded without deleting the item.

n Reasons for rejection also allow you to verify what your customers think of your products during a certain time period. The marketing department can use these results as an important planning tool for their strategies in the next sales period.

n The "Fast change" function allows you to reject several or all items of a document at the same time. A button is also available for rejecting all the items in a document.

Page 74: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 16

SAP AG 1999

Re-determined Data

n Customer master

n Customer-material info record

n Texts

n Free Goods

n Prices

n Output

n Plant and shipping point

Unchanged Data

n Sales area

n Sales office and sales group

n Availability and product allocation

n Batches

No changes if there are:

nn StatusStatus--relevant preceding relevant preceding documentsdocuments

nn Subsequent documentsSubsequent documents

Change Sold-to Party in Sales Document

n At times, it can be beneficial to start entering individual items before you enter the sold-to party, especially when phone sales are involved.

n Because a sold-to party is always required to create a sales document, a default value must be set in the sold-to party field. You can do this with your user-specific parameters or - depending on the sales document type - with a transaction variant.

n The incompleteness log of the sales document ensures that the person responsible replaces the default customer value with the actual sold-to party.

n To do this, the default sold-to party must be flagged as such in the customer master (activate customer type Default SP).

n When the sold-to party is changed, the changed value runs through the same checks as the initial entry. As a result, a variety of data is re-determined - such as texts, prices, and delivering plant.

n You can also change the ship-to party later on the overview screen. However, the system does not re-determine the sold-to party in this case.

Page 75: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 17

SAP AG 1999

Sales Order Processing: Summary

You are now able to:

l Find and use the tools and help for entering and processing sales orders

l Determine the origin of document data from various sources, like the material master, the customer master, or customizing

Page 76: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 18

Sales Order Processing - Exercises

Unit: Sales Order Processing

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Use the different tools for processing orders

• Explain how master data is proposed in sales documents

The order clerk only has to enter a few items when creating sales documents. The majority of the information is copied from the master data.

1-1 Create a standard order for product T-ATC## (1 unit) with purchase order number ##LO605-OR03.

1-1-1 Do not specify the sales area (delete any values that default). The ship-to party is T-S62F##.

1-1-2 Which sold-to party is determined by the system? Sold-To Party: _________________________________

1-1-3 Which sales area is automatically determined by the system? Sales area: _________________________________ Where does the system find this information? ______________________________________________________

Page 77: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 19

1-2 Your customer T-S62A## places an order with you. They want the delivery to take place in 2 weeks. The purchase order number is ##LO605-OR04.

1-2-1 Enter the first item for material T-ATC## (quantity: 5 units). You offer the following terms of payment to your customer for this item: 14 days 3%, 30 days 2%, 45 days net. Terms of payment: _________________________________

1-2-2 Enter another item with material T-ATD## (20 units). This item has different terms of payment: 20 days 2%, 30 days net. This material should also be delivered to another address. Change the ship-to party of this item to your customer T-S62B##. Terms of payment: _________________________________

1-2-3 Deliver the order on the delivery date requested by your customer. What message appears in the log? ______________________________________________________

If necessary, set the selection date for the delivery to two weeks from today.

1-2-4 Which delivering plant is determined by the system? Delivering plant for item 10: _____________________________ Delivering plant for item 20: _____________________________

1-2-5 Which master records does the system use to extract this information? ______________________________________________________

Page 78: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 20

1-3 Your plant 1000 contains stock for material T-ATD##. This is the material that should be delivered from this plant, when customer T-S62A## orders it.

1-3-1 Create a customer-material information record so that this material is always taken from plant 1000 for this customer.

1-3-2 The customer manages this material with number PC-M-## and description PC-Monitor ##. Enter these details in the customer-material info record.

1-3-3 You receive an order from customer T-S62A## with purchase order number ##LO605-OR05. The order consists of 12 monitors, which the customer manages under material number PC-M-##. The customer wants to receive the delivery in two weeks. Create the sales order.

Can you fulfill the customer’s requested delivery date?

Which plant will be used to supply the delivery?

You can use the Ordering Party overview screen to enter items with the customer’s purchase order numbers.

Your customer tells you that she would like to add to her purchase order number ##LO605-TA05.

1-4-1 Enter another item with 16 units of material T-ATE##. The delivery date is in two week’s time.

Page 79: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 21

1-5 Optional

Your customer can get the first order item of document ##LO605-OR05 for a better price somewhere else, so they reject this item.

1-5-1 Cancel this item by entering the relevant reason for rejection (save the order before going onto the next step.

1-5-2 Display the delivery and rejection status for the order.

Overall processing: ______________ Header - Delivery status: ______________ Header - Rejection status: ______________

Item 10 Overall processing: ______________ Item - Delivery status: ______________ Header - Rejection status: ______________

Item 20 Overall processing: ______________ Item - Delivery status: ______________ Header - Rejection status: ______________

1-5-3 Create a delivery for this order with shipping point 1200. The delivery date is two weeks from today. Decrease the quantity of the first item in the delivery by half. Save the delivery. Check the status of the order.

Overall processing: ______________ Header - Delivery status: ______________

Item 20 Overall processing: ______________ Item - Delivery status: ______________

Page 80: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 22

Sales Order Processing - Solutions

Unit: Sales Order Processing

1-1 Enter the standard order.

à Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Order à Create

1-1-1 Order type: OR Ship-to party: T-S62F## Purchase order number: ##LO605-OR03

1-1-2 Sold-To Party: T-S62E## HiTech AG

1-1-3 Sales area: 1000 / 10 / 00

1000 / 10 / 00 In the first step, the system determines the sold-to party from the ship-to party. The sales area is then determined from the sold-to party’s master record.

1-2 Enter the standard order.

1-2-1 Enter the item.

Order type: OR Sold-to party: T-S62A## Purchase order number: ##LO605-OR04

Material: T-ATC## (5 units) Terms of payment: ZB01

1-2-2 Enter another item.

Material: T-ATD## (20 units) Terms of payment: ZB03 Ship-to party : T-S62B##

Page 81: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 23

1-2-3 Deliver the order on the delivery date requested by your customer.

Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Shipping and transportation à Outbound Delivery à Create à Single document à With reference to sales order

Shipping point: 1200 Selection date: Two weeks from today.

Choose Error log.

“Item 000020: delivery split because the partners are different.”

The cause is that the two order items are to be delivered to different ship-to parties, which means each must be on a separate delivery.

1-2-4 Delivering plant for item 10: 1200 Delivering plant for item 20: 1200

1-2-5 Which master records does the system use to extract this information?

From the materials master record

1-3 Save the agreement with your customer as a master record.

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Master data à Agreements

1-3-1 Create a customer-material information record.

à Customer-material informationà Create

Customer: T-S62A## Sales organization: 1000 Distribution channel: 10 Material: T-ATD## Delivering plant: 1000

1-3-2 Complete the customer number and name for the material.

Customer material: PC-M-## Customer description: PC Monitor ##

1-3-3 Enter the standard order.

Page 82: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 24

Sold-To Party: T-S62A## Purchase order number: ##LO605-OR05 Requested delivery date: Two weeks from today

Customer material: PC-M-## (12 units)

The requested delivery date can be met. Delivery will take place from plant 1000, as agreed.

1-4 Add to the order with purchase order number ##LO605-TA05.

1-4-1 Material: T-ATE## (16 units) Delivery date: Two weeks from today

1-5 Optional

Change the order with purchase order number ##LO605-OR05.

1-5-1 Reject the first item.

Reason for rejection: Too expensive

1-5-2 Display the delivery and rejection status for the order.

Choose Status overview and then expand all.

Overall processing: Being processed Header - Delivery status: Not delivered Header - Rejection status: Partially rejected

Item 10 Overall processing: Completed Item - Delivery status: Not delivered Item - Rejection status: Fully rejected

Item 20 Overall processing: Open Item - Delivery status: Not delivered Item - Rejection status: Nothing rejected

1-5-3 Create the delivery.

Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Shipping and transportation à Outbound Delivery à Create à Single document à With reference to sales order

Shipping point: 1200 Selection date: Two weeks from today.

Page 83: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 25

Delivery quantity of item 10: 8 units.

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order à Display

Choose Status overview and then expand all.

Overall processing: Being processed Header - Delivery status: Partially delivered

Item 20 Overall processing: Being processed Item - Delivery status: Partially delivered

Page 84: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG 1999

Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types

l Document types in Sales

l Sales document functions

l Sales document structure and data

l System settings for sales documents

l Assigning organizational units

Unit Contents:

Page 85: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG 1999

Sales Document Type: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

l Identify the elements that control the sales documents

l Name examples of different sales document types used for different business processes

l Explain what the sales document type does

l Create Customizing settings for the sales document type

l Restrict the validity of sales document types to sales areas

Page 86: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG 1999

Sales Document Type: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

0.00ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special business

transactions

9. Incomp-leteness

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

1. Introduction

3. Sales order processing

10. Partnerdetermination

Page 87: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

SAP AG 1999

Sales Document Type: Business Scenario

l Your company, IDES Inc., has been using the SAP R/3 SD module successfully for years.

l Company management has now decided to expand the company's sales activities. In the future, customers should also be able to place orders at trade fairs.

l It must be possible to control and evaluate the new sales activities separately from all existing activities.

l It is your responsibility to configure a separate sales document types for trade fair sales.

Page 88: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 5

SAP AG 1999

Controlling Business Processes in Sales

HeaderHeader

Item Item

Schedule lineSchedule line

Subsequent Subsequent documentdocument

Sales document type

Sales document type

Item categoryItem category

Schedule line category

Schedule line category

DocumentDocument

Control parameters

Control parameters

Control parameters

Copyingcontrol

Copyingcontrol

Copyingcontrol

n Sales processes are controlled by Customizing for sales documents. n Customizing for sales documents can be done at header, item or schedule line level, depending on

the structure of the document. The instruments for control are the sales document type, item category and schedule line category.

n You need to make settings in Customizing so that the item and schedule line categories are determined automatically in the sales document.

n To complete the setup of a business process in your system, you need to configure the system for forwarding data from the sales document to subsequent documents according to your needs. You can do this in copying control.

Page 89: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 6

SAP AG 1999

Basic Functions

Material req. planning

No materials planning

No inventory management

Schedule line categoriesSchedule line categories

Standard item

Free-of-charge item

Text item

Item categoriesItem categories

Sales document typesSales document types

Standard sales order

Inquiry

Quotation

Basic functionsBasic functions

• Partner determination• Pricing• Incompleteness• Free Goods• Determining materials• Requirements transfer• Delivery scheduling• Output• Text determination• Credit management• ...

n You need to configure several general sales functions (basic functions) for the sales documents. These include:

Partner determination Pricing Output determination Text determination Material determination Credit management Incompleteness checks Delivery scheduling etc. You can fine-tune these settings at each level within the sales document.

n The sales document is not completely configured until you have processed all of the necessary basic functions.

n Examples: For pricing you can set up your own pricing procedure for a sales document type. First you configure the sales document type and pricing procedure separately. Then you assign the procedure to the sales document type. You can also create default output types for each sales document type. To do this, you assign the relevant output determination procedure to the sales document type in Customizing for output.

n You can use different functions for different sales document types. For example, pricing but not inventory updates are needed to create an inquiry.

Page 90: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 7

SAP AG 1999

Examples of Sales Document Types

RE = ReturnsCR = Credit memo requestSDF= Subsequent free-of-charge

deliveryDR = Debit memo request

OR = Standard orderRO = Rush orderCS = Cash salesCF = Consignment fill-upDF = Delivery free-of-charge

NMS= Quantity contractSA = Scheduling agreementRC = Rental contractWK1= General value contract

IN = InquiryQT = Quotation

PrePre--Sales PhaseSales Phase Outline AgreementsOutline Agreements

Sales PhaseSales Phase ComplaintsComplaints

n Different sales document types are delivered with the system to represent the different business processes. These provide you with examples of how to use sales document types.

Page 91: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 8

SAP AG 1999

Functions in the Sales Document Type

Sales Sales document document

typetype

Mandatory reference

Number assignment

Enhancement for contracts

ChecksDivisionOpen quotations/contractsInfo record

Default valuesDateBilling type/delivery typeBlocks

• Partner determination• Pricing• Incompleteness• Free goods• Determining materials• Output• ...

Assigning basic functions

Assigning basic functions

n In Customizing for the sales document type, you configure the settings that influence the sales process, such as the sales document category, delivery and billing blocks or the document types for subsequent deliveries and billing documents.

n You can also save default values that appear when you create a document. You can overwrite these values at different levels of the document to match particular procedures, such as the customer's requested delivery date or certain basic requirements for contracts.

n In addition, you can activate various checks such as messages about open quotations or outline agreements, searches for customer-material info records, or credit limit checks. Note that activating checks can affect system performance.

n Note: � Adding a new sales document type to sales processing is time-consuming because many of the

entries in Customizing depend on the sales document type. To avoid any difficulties, you should generate a new sales document type by copying an existing one with similar functions. This document type should be one from the SAP standard system or should already have been tested by your company. � When you copy the document type, both the fields and the dependent entries are copied. Once the

system has copied the document, it automatically generates a log that you can save for documentation purposes.

Page 92: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 9

SAP AG 1999

Order Types Permitted for Sales Areas

Sales organization1000 Standard order

Inquiry

Free-of-charge deliveries

Returns

Distribution channel10

Division00

Sales document typesSales document typesSales areaSales area

Permitted?Permitted?

n You can use Customizing to define which sales document types are valid in which: � Sales organizations � Distribution channels � Divisions

n This means you can limit the validity of your sales document types at the level of sales organization, distribution channel and division.

Page 93: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 10

SAP AG 1999

Sales Document Type: Summary

You are now able to:

l Identify the elements that control the sales documents

l Name examples of different sales document types used for different business processes

l Explain what the sales document type does

l Create Customizing settings for the sales document type

l Restrict the validity of sales document types to sales areas

Page 94: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 11

Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types - Exercises

Unit: Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Control sales document types in Customizing

• Implement your own sales processes with new sales document types

You want to control and evaluate your sales activities separately for trade fairs. To do this, you use a different sales document type, which you set up in Customizing to meet your requirements. You limit the use of that sales document type for the sales areas defined.

1-1 Your new trade fair order should meet the following requirements:

• Description: Fair##-order

• The number assignment should be internal – you should not be able to assign numbers externally.

• Item numbering should have an increment of 100.

• Order entry should begin with the Item overview screen.

• Checking open quotations or contracts is not necessary.

• When billing documents are created, the system should re-run pricing. Note: In the standard system, billing type F1 is configured such that pricing is re-run automatically when you create a new billing document.

• Your company wants the default requested delivery date to be automatically proposed with a lead time of 2 days.

• Pricing should be based on the current date.

• The system should automatically propose the current date as the purchase order date.

Change order type ZA##, which has been generated as a copy of the standard order (order type OR) to meet these requirements.

Page 95: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 12

1-2 Check your settings by creating an order with the new sales document type ZA## and two items.

1-2-1 Your customer T-S62B## orders 10 units of material T-ATB## at a trade fair. Create a trade fair order (sales order type ZA##) The purchase order number is ##LO605-ZA##01.

1-2-2 Check the fields containing the document number of the order, the requested delivery date, the pricing date, the order date, the overview screen, and the item numbering for this order.

2-1 Optional

Compare the two sales document types Standard order and Rush order.

2-1-1 What are the differences between these two types?

____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

2-1-2 Change sales document type ZA## so that it is like a Rush order.

Note: Check the settings for immediate delivery; shipping conditions and lead time in days.

2-1-3 Create an order with order type ZA## in sales area 1000 / 10 / 00 for customer T-S62A## and your material T-ATA## (10 units). The purchase order number is ##LO605-ZA##03.

2-1-4 View the document flow to determine whether the delivery was created.

Outbound Delivery number: ____________________________________

2-1-5 Undo your changes to order type ZA## when you are finished!

Page 96: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 13

Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types - Solutions

Unit: Controlling Sales Documents with Sales Document Types

1-1 Change sales document type ZA##.

à Tools à Accelerated SAP à Customizing à Project editing à SAP Reference IMG

à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Sales documents à Sales document header à Define sales document types

Select document type ZA##. Choose Details.

Description: Fair##-order Number range external assignment: Blank Item number increment: 100 FCODE for overview screen: UER2 Quotation messages: Blank Outline agreement messages: Blank Delivery-related billing type: F1 Order-related billing type: F1 Lead time in days: 2 Proposed pricing date: Blank Proposed purchase order date: Activate

1-2 Verify the settings in the sales order.

1-2-1 Create the sales order.

1-2-2 Check the Customizing of your sales document type ZA##.

Fair##-order: Blank (Number is assigned internally when you save) Requested delivery date: Two days from today Pricing date: Today Purchase order date: Today Overview screen: Item overview Item number: 100

2-1 Compare the document types in Customizing.

Page 97: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 14

à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Sales documents à Sales document header à Define sales document types

2-1-1 The following fields in the rush order are different from those in the standard order (Note: these are the critical fields that are different – there are others):

Imm. delivery: Activated Shipping condition: 10 immediately Lead time in days: Blank

2-1-2 Change the document type.

2-1-3 Create the order and save.

2-1-4 Display the order and choose Document flow.

2-1-5 Undo the changes to the document type.

Imm. delivery: Blank Shipping condition: Blank Lead time in days: 2

Page 98: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG 1999

Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category

l Item categories in the sales document

l Functions of the item category

l Controlling sales document items

l Determining the item category automatically in sales documents

l Using item categories to control bills of material in sales documents

Unit Contents:

Page 99: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG 1999

Item Category: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

l Identify and explain the important control parameters for item categories

l Create a new item category

l Configure the system so that item categories are automatically assigned to a sales document type

l Control settings for bills of material in the sales document

Page 100: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG 1999

Item Category: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

0.00ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special business

transactions

9. Incomp-leteness

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

1. Introduction

3. Sales order processing

10. Partnerdetermination

Page 101: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

SAP AG 1999

Item Category: Business Scenario

l Company management has now decided to expand the company's sales activities.

l In future, you want to use BOMs to sell certain products. In addition, customers should also be able to place orders at trade fairs.

l To control these processes separately, you want to be able to influence document control at the item level.

Page 102: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 5

SAP AG 1999

Examples of Item Categories

REN = Standard item in returns

G2TX= Text item in credit memo request

KLN = Free-of-charge item

TAD = Service in standard order

BVNN= Free-of-charge item in cash sales

KEN = Standard item in consignment issue

KMN = Standard item in quantity contract

WVN= Standard item inmaintenance contract

WKN= Item in value contract

AFN = Standard item in InquiryAGTX= Text item in quotation

PrePre--Sales PhaseSales Phase Outline AgreementsOutline Agreements

Sales PhaseSales Phase ComplaintsComplaints

n Different item categories are delivered with the system to support the different business processes. You can use them as examples or as templates for creating your own item categories.

n The item category is defined with a four-digit key. These keys are copied automatically from the original German keys and are not translated. The first two characters provide a clue to the sales document type that was originally designed for these item categories. The last two characters indicate the use of the item category, such as:

­ AFTX Sales document type: IN Usage: TEXT ­ TAD Sales document type: OR Item category group: LEIS ­ KMN Sales document type: NMS Item category group: NORM

n You can decide if you would like to keep the standard keys or define your own so that the abbreviation refers to your sales document types and how the category is configured.

Page 103: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 6

SAP AG 1999

Item Category Functions

Item categoryItem category

Separatebusiness data

Schedule lines permitted

Billing relevance

Delivery relevance

Pricing

Assigning basic functions

Assigning basic functions

• Partner determination• Text determination• Incompleteness• . . .

Completion rule

BOMs

n The item category controls what the item does in the sales document and in any later processing for that business transaction.

n The essential characteristics of an item category decide: ­ Whether business data in the item can be different to that of the document header ­ Whether pricing applies to the item ­ Whether and how an item is billed ­ Whether the item refers to an item or whether it is just a text item ­ Which incompleteness log is used to check the item data

n You can change the settings for the item categories defined in the standard system. You can also define new item categories. To do this, you should always copy item categories that already exist and have been tested, then change them to meet your requirements.

n The delivery relevance indicator is only for items without schedule lines. You could indicate that a text item was relevant to delivery, for example, so that the system copies this item from the sales order into the delivery document.

Page 104: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 7

SAP AG 1999

Controlling the Items in the Sales Document

Standard item in quotation

Standard item in quotation

Standard item in order

Standard item in order

Free-of-charge item in order

Free-of-charge item in order

PricingSchedule lines allowedNot relevant for billing

AGN

TAN

TANN

Pricing Schedule lines allowed Relevant for billing

No pricingSchedule lines allowedNot relevant for billing

Text item forinquiry

Text item forinquiry AFTX

No pricingSchedule lines allowedNot relevant for billing

Function Example

The diagram contains examples with settings as they are provided in the standard R/3 System. n Every item in a sales document is controlled through its item category. This enables you to

­ Use different item categories in different sales document types, ­ Realize different business processes for each item in the sales document.

n You can configure the functions of the item categories according to your requirements. For example: ­ You do not need price determination for the text item in the inquiry (item category AFTX), but

you want to enter delivery quantities and delivery dates, and you therefore allow schedule lines. ­ You want schedule lines for a free-of-charge item in the sales order (item category TANN) but

you do not want to carry out pricing for this item or transfer it to billing.

Page 105: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 8

SAP AG 2003

Subitems

Item 30

Item 20Higher-level item 10

Item 10

Header

Examples ofSubitems

Order

Free goods

BOM components

Service

n You can assign an item to a higher-level item if, for example, a customer receives free goods for ordering a certain quantity of your product.

n Example: Item 10: M1 100 units 1000 Euro Item 20: M2 10 units Free of charge For ordering 100 pieces of item 10, the customer receives 10 units free of charge. To display this, you enter item 10 in the higher-level item field for item 20.

n This simple form of supplying free goods is supplemented with the automatic determination of free goods (see the unit "Free goods").

n Other examples for using sub-items include the explosion of BOMs or service items in sales documents.

n Note : Alternative items can also be recorded in quotations and Inquiries in addition to sub-items. Alternative items are treated differently from sub-items; for example, alternative items are not included in the net value of the document.

Page 106: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 9

SAP AG 1999

Assignment: Item Category to Sales Document Type

l System proposall Alternatives

Item category groupItem category group

Sales document typeSales document type

Item category of upper-level itemItem category of upper-level item

Item category(ies)Item category(ies)

Item usageItem usage

Material master

View:Sales: Sales org. 2

ABAP/4 EditorABAP/4 Editor

form XY_001.

sy-subrc = 4.

check: FeldX ne FeldY.

sy-subrc = 0.

endform.ProgramProgram

Sales document

Item

Sales document

Header

n Item categories are assigned to sales document types. n The purpose of this assignment is to: � Configure the system to propose an item category when you create an order � Define alternative item categories to the system proposal

n This assignment is influenced by: � The item category group from the material master record.

The item category group allows you to group different materials that behave in a similar way during Sales and Distribution processes, for example. You can also define new item category groups if needed. � Item usage, which in certain cases is set internally in the program.

The system uses TEXT if the user enters an item in the inquiry or quotation by entering data in the "Description" field without specifying a material number. FREE is used for controlling the free goods item. � Item category of a higher-level item (in the case of a sub-item)

Page 107: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 10

SAP AG 1999

BOMs: Example: Computer

Monitor CPU KeyboardMouse Floppy drive

Screen

Computer

Casing

n A computer consists of several components. In turn, each of these components is constructed from several individual parts.

n You can store this structure in the system as a bill of material. All the items in the bill of material (BOM) that you want to control in the sales document must be flagged as relevant for sales. (Please note: the items in a bill of material are controlled differently than the item categories in a sales document). If you create a BOM material with BOM usage 5 (SD), all the items in the bill of material will be automatically flagged as relevant to sales.

n By making the appropriate settings in Customizing for the item categories in the sales document, you can copy the components in the bill of material to a sales order. To process the sales document you only need to enter the material number of the BOM.

n The BOM appears in the sales document as a structure with main and sub-items. The system explodes the BOMs in the sales order by automatically generating sub-items for the components.

Page 108: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 11

SAP AG 1999

Exploding Bills of Material in Sales Documents

Item category of sub-item:

à Not priced

TAQ

TAE

Material master:R-1001

Sales: Sales org. 2

Item category group: ERLA

Material master:R-1001

Item category group: LUMF

Sales: Sales org. 2

Alternative control of BOM

Sales document

Item category of main item:

à Pricing

Item category of sub-item:

à Pricing

Sales document

Item category of main item:

à Not priced

TAP

TAN

n The individual item categories control what a bill of material can do in a sales document. In Customizing you define and assign item categories for the main and sub-items in the BOM in the sales document.

n A specific item category group assigned to the material master record of the main item defines which item categories are assigned to the main item.

n To determine how far the BOM should be exploded in the sales document, you need to define the extent of the structure of the item category for the main item.

n When you determine the sub-items, the system also needs to know the item category of the higher-level item.

n In Customizing for item categories, you control which item are relevant to pricing and how you want to implement requirements transfer.

Page 109: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 12

SAP AG 1999

Item Category: Summary

You are now able to:

l Identify and explain the important control parameters for item categories

l Create a new item category

l Configure the system so that item categories are automatically assigned to a sales document type

l Control settings for bills of material in the sales document

Page 110: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 13

Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category - Exercises

Unit: Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category

Topic: Item Categories and Item Category Determination

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Configure the Customizing of item categories

• Explain and control the automatic determination of item categories.

Items in sales documents frequently have to be controlled differently, such as for pricing or billing.

This applies to items

• That pass through several sales documents during the course of the transaction

• Within an individual sales document

Item categories are determined automatically.

1-1 Your customer tells you that she would like to add to her purchase order number ##LO605-TA05.

1-1-1 Enter another item with 16 units of material T-ATE##. The delivery date is in two week’s time.

1-1-2 You have also agreed to give your customer a free goods item of 1 unit of material T-ATE##. Enter the corresponding sub- item.

1-1-3 Is this item included in the net value of the order? ____________________________________

1-1-4 What are the item categories in this order? Item 10: _________________________________

Item 20: _________________________________

Item 30: _________________________________

Item 40: _________________________________

Page 111: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 14

1-2 Complete the following table:

Item category

Description Business data

Schedule lines

permitted

Item relev. for

delivery

Pricing Structure scope

TAN Standard item

TANN Free-of-charge item

TAP Extent delivered

TAQ Extent delivered

TATX Text item

TAD Service

TAE Not priced

1-3 Why is the item category in the order automatically proposed by the system? Look for the relevant table in Customizing. What are the key fields for automatically determining the item categories?

1st key field: _________________________________

2nd key field: _________________________________

3rd key field: _________________________________

4th key field: _________________________________

1-4 Complete the following table:

Sales

Document Type

Item category

group

Item usage

Higher-level item category

Default item category

Manual item category

Manual item category

IN DIEN

OR TEXT

OR NORM

OR NORM TAN

OR NORM TAP

OR NORM TAQ

ZA## ERLA

ZA## ERLA TAQ

ZA## LUMF

Page 112: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 15

ZA## LUMF TAP

1-5 Optional Your customer T-S62A## places a standard order with purchase order number ##LO605-OR06 in sales area 1000 / 10 / 00.

1-5-1 Enter the standard order with a requested delivery date of one week from today. Enter the following positions:

Material: T-ATA## (5 units) Material: T-ZSA## (3 hours)

Which item category groups are assigned to the materials?

Item 10: _________________________________ Item 20: _________________________________

1-5-2 Which item categories are used? In Customizing, check which of the item categories are relevant for delivery and pricing.

Item Category

Pricing Schedule lines

permitted

Item relev. for delivery

Item 10

Item 20

1-5-3 Deliver the order with purchase order number ##LO605-OR06. Delivery items are generated for which order items? _________________________________

Page 113: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 16

Exercises

Unit: Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category

Topic: Bills of Material (BOMs) in the Sales Document

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Create master records for sales BOMs

• Control BOMs in sales documents

You often have to explode BOMs in sales documents. In the process, you have to determine, for example, at which level price determination and/or transfer of requirements is performed.

2-1 You want your material T-FUA## in plant: 1200 to appear as a bill of material in your sales documents.

2-1-1 Enter a sales bill of material for this material (use Sales and distribution 5) with component T-ATA##, T-ATF## and T-ATG## (one unit each). Configure the bill of material items as stock items (L).

2-1-2 Create an order for your customer T-S62A## and your material T-FUA## (10 units). The purchase order number is ##LO605-OR07. Does the system explode the bill of material? ____________________________________________________________ Why or why not? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

Page 114: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 17

2-1-3 In future, you only want to determine the prices for the finished product. You want to list the individual components of the finished product for informational purposes. Change the material master for your material T-FUA## so that pricing only takes place at the main item level.

2-1-4 Check the effects of your change in the sales document by creating a new order for customer T-S62A## ordering material T-FUA## (10 units). Does the system explode the bill of material? Which items affect the net value of the order? PO number: ##LO605-TA08

2-1-5 Change your material T-FUA## so that pricing only takes place at the subitem level.

2-1-6 Check the effects of your change in the sales document by creating a new order for customer T-S62A## ordering material T-FUA## (10 units). Does the system explode the bill of material? Which items affect the net value of the order? PO number: ##LO605-TA09

Page 115: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 18

-Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category - Solutions

Unit: Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category

Topic: Item Categories and Item Category Determination

1-1 Add to the order with purchase order number ##LO605-TA05.

1-1-1 Material: T-ATE## (16 units) Delivery date: Two weeks from today

1-1-2 Enter the sub- item.

Material: T-ATE## (1 unit) Higher- level item: 20

1-1-3 Is this item included in the net value of the order?

Select the free goods item and choose Item conditions.

No. The net value of the item is zero.

1-1-4 Determine the item categories.

à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order à Display

Item 10: TAN Item 20: TAN Item 30: TAN Item 40: TANN

Page 116: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 19

1-2 Check the definitions of the respective item categories.

à IMG à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Sales Documents à Sales Document Item à Define item categories

Item

Category Description Business

data Schedule

lines permitted

Item relev. for delivery

Pricing Structure scope

TAN Standard item x x - X -

TANN Free-of-charge item

x x - B -

TAP Extent delivered - x - - A

TAQ Extent delivered x x X A

TATX Text item - - x - -

TAD Service x x - X -

TAE Not priced - x - - -

1-3 Check the assignment of each item category.

à IMG à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Sales Documents à Sales Document Item à Assign item categories

1st key field: SaTu Sales Doc. Type

2nd key field: ItCGr Item category group

3rd key field: Usage Item usage

4th key field: HlevItCa Item category of upper-level item

1-4 Sales

Document Type

Item category

group

Item usage

Higher-level item category

Default item category

Manual item category

Manual item category

IN DIEN AFX

OR TEXT AGTX

OR NORM TAN TAP TAQ OR NORM TAN TANN

OR NORM TAP TAN

OR NORM TAQ TAE

ZA## ERLA TAQ

ZA## ERLA TAQ TAE

ZA## LUMF TAP

Page 117: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 20

ZA## LUMF TAP TAN

1-5 Create the sales order.

1-5-1 Navigate from the order to the material master record Environment à Display material, and then select tab page “Sales” in the material master: SalesOrg2, Item 10: Item category group: NORM Item 20: Item Category Group: LEIS

1-5-2 Item

Category Pricing Schedule

lines permitted

Item relev. for delivery

Item 10 TAN X X -

Item 20 TAD X X -

1-5-3 A delivery item is generated for the standard item.

Page 118: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 21

Solutions

Unit: Controlling Sales Documents with the Item Category

Topic: Bills of Material (BOMs) in the Sales Document

2-1 Enter and work with a bill of material.

2-1-1 Enter the bill of material into an order.

à Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Master data à BOMs à BOM à Material BOM à Create

Plant: 1200 Dresden Usage: 5 Sales and Distribution

BOM item category: L Stock item

2-1-2 Enter the bill of material into an order.

The BOM is not exploded.

à IMG à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Sales Documents à Sales Document Item à Define item categories

The item category of the main item in the BOM, TAN, does not support the explosion of BOMs in the sales document (the ”Structure scope” field is blank).

2-1-3 Change the item category group in the material master of the main item in the BOM.

à Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Master data à Products à Material à Trading goods à Change

Choose Sales: Sales org. data 2

Sales organization: 1000 Distribution channel: 10

Item Category Group: ERLA

Page 119: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 22

2-1-4 Create an order.

The BOM is exploded. Pricing is only performed for the main item, as a result, the net value of the order is calculated exclusively from this item.

2-1-5 Change the item category group in the material master of the main item in the BOM.

à Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Master data à Products à Material à Trading goods à Change

Choose Sales: Sales org. data 2

Sales organization: 1000 Distribution channel: 10

Item Category Group: LUMF

2-1-6 Create an order.

The BOM is exploded. Pricing is only performed for the sub-item, as a result, the net value of the order is calculated exclusively from the sub-items.

Page 120: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG 1999

Controlling Sales Documents with Schedule Line Categories

l Schedule line categories in sales documents

l Functions of schedule line category

l Controlling the schedule line category

l Automatically determining the schedule line category

Unit Contents:

Page 121: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG 1999

Schedule Line Category: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

l Identify and explain the most important control parameters for schedule line categories

l Create a new schedule line category

l Configure your settings so that schedule line categories are automatically assigned to each sales document item

Page 122: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG 1999

Schedule line category: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

0,--ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special Business

Transactions

9. Incompletion

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

1. Introduction

3. Sales Order Processing

10. Partnerdetermination

Page 123: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

SAP AG 1999

Schedule Line Category: Business Scenario

l Changes that affect the entire logistics process are taking place at your company, IDES AG.

l One of the interfaces to the other logistics modules represents the schedule lines of the sales documents.

l As a result, you have to find out about the control parameters and the automatic determination of the schedule line categories.

Page 124: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 5

SAP AG 1999

Examples of Schedule Line Categories

DN = Schedule line in returns without MRP

D0 = Consignment returns

CP = Order schedule line with MRP

C0 = Consignment issuewithout availabilitycheck

CV = Scheduling agreement with deterministic MRP

AT = Inquiry schedule lineBN = Schedule line in quotation

without MRP

PrePre--Sales PhaseSales Phase Outline AgreementsOutline Agreements

Sales PhaseSales Phase ComplaintsComplaints

n Different schedule line categories are delivered with the system to provide different control options for the items throughout the sales process. You can use them as is or as templates for creating your own schedule line categories.

n The schedule line category is defined with a two-character key. The standard system already includes keys that often indicate the usage of the schedule line category.

The first character indicates the sales process in which the schedule line category is used. A = Inquiry B = Quotation C = Order D = Returns The second character in the key indicates what happens to the schedule line within logistics. T = No inventory management X = No inventory management with goods issue N = No materials planning P = Material requirements planning V = Consumption-based planning

You can decide if you would like to keep the standard keys or define your own so that the abbreviation refers to your sales document types and how the category is configured.

Page 125: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 6

SAP AG 1999

Schedule Line Category

Delivery relevance

Purchasing

Requirements transfer

Goods movement

Availability check

Schedule line Schedule line categorycategory • Incompleteness

• . . .

Assigning basic functions

Assigning basic functions

n Schedule lines contain delivery dates and quantities as well as information about the requirements transfer and inventory management. They are a prerequisite for delivering materials.

n In Customizing for item categories, you decide if you will allow schedule lines for the item. You can assign schedule line categories to each item category. By defining a schedule line category, you determine which schedule lines are actually relevant for delivery. You must activate the relevant to delivery indicator if you want the goods to be physically delivered.

n In the schedule line category you set the movement type to control which changes to quantities and values are posted to inventory accounting. Inventory management is responsible for maintaining the movement types. Movement types have been configured for all processes in the SAP standard system. Many of the movement types relevant to SD are between 601 and 699.

n You can deactivate requirements transfer and availability checks at the schedule line level. n A prerequisite for the purchase order is typically a purchase requisition and this document can be

automatically generated from the sales document. To do this, you need to configure the purchase order type as well as item and account assignment categories in the purchase order.

n If you activate a delivery block in the schedule line category, this block is automatically set at the schedule line level in the sales document.

Page 126: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 7

SAP AG 1999

Controlling Schedule Lines in Sales Documents

BN

CP

DN

Not rel. for deliveryNo requirements trans.No movement type

Relevant for deliveryRequirements transferMovement type 601

Relevant for deliveryNo requirements trans.Movement type 651

Function Example

Schedule line in Schedule line in quotationquotation

Requirements planningRequirements planningin orderin order

Schedule line in Schedule line in returnsreturns

n Examples in the R/3 standard system. n Schedule lines in quotations are not relevant for delivery. The requirements transfer is inactive in the

schedule line category. Goods movements are not necessary in your warehouses so no movement type is needed..

n Since schedule lines from category CP generate delivery items in the sales order, the relevant to delivery indicator is activated. The requirements transfer is active in the schedule line category. Complete Customizing for requirements transfer (for example, for requirements planning) requires you to define and assign the requirements class. The goods movement is controlled by movement type 601. With this movement type, when the goods issue for the delivery is posted, the quantity shipped is taken from unrestricted use stocks.

n If you want a returns delivery to follow a return order, you need a schedule line category that is relevant for delivery. In this case, transferring requirements is not necessary. Movement type 651 enables you to make sure that goods receipt goes to blocked stock returns.

Page 127: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 8

SAP AG 1999

Assignment: Schedule Line Category to Item Category

l System proposall Alternatives

Material master

View: MRP 1

Sales documentItem

Item

Item categoryItem category

MRP typeMRP type

Schedule line Schedule line category(ies)category(ies)

n Schedule line categories are assigned to item categories. n The purpose of this assignment is to: � Configure the system to propose a schedule line category automatically when you create an order � Determine the schedule line categories that the user can choose instead of the system proposal

n The assignment is influenced by the materials requirements planning (MRP) type in the material master record.

n The system takes two steps to automatically determine the schedule line category: � First it tries to determine the schedule line category using the key combination of item category

and MRP type. � If no schedule line category is found, the system searches for the key combination of item category

/ no MRP type.

Page 128: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 9

SAP AG 1999

Schedule line category: Summary

You are now able to:

l Identify and explain the most important control parameters for schedule line categories

l Create a new schedule line category

l Configure your settings so that schedule line categories are automatically assigned to each sales document item

Page 129: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 10

Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Lines - Exercises

Unit: Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Lines

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Configure the Customizing of schedule line categories

• Explain and control the automatic determination of schedule line categories

The schedule lines contain delivery quantities and dates for a sales document item. Later on in the business process, a schedule line can either create an item in a delivery or it can transfer the data to a subsequent sales document. You use the schedule line category to decide, for example, whether the system should check availability or transfer requirements for that schedule line.

1-1 Customer T-S62A## requests a quotation for 10 units of material T-ATA##.

1-1-1 Enter the quotation with purchase order number ##LO605-OT02. The quotation should be valid for a month.

1-1-2 On what date has the delivery of the schedule line been confirmed?

Confirmed date: _______________________________________

1-1-3 Which item and schedule line categories have been determined?

Item category: _______________________________________

Schedule line category: _______________________________________

1-1-4 How does the schedule line category control this schedule line?

Item relev. for delivery _______________________________________

Requirements transfer: _______________________________________

Availability check: _______________________________________

1-1-5 Try to deliver the quotation (change the delivery selection date to the schedule line confirmed date).

Page 130: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 11

Can you do it? ____________________________________________________________

1-2 Complete the following table:

Schedule Line

Category

Description Availability Transfer of requirement

s

Item relev. for delivery

Movement type

AT Inquiry schedule line

BN No MRP

BP Deterministic MRP

CN No MRP

CP Deterministic MRP

DN Returns

1-3 After a comprehensive check of your quotation, customer T-S62A## places an order with you.

1-3-1 Enter a standard order with reference to the quotation created in previous exercise (order will use purchase order number ##LO605-OR10). Copy the quotation completely into the order.

1-3-2 On what date has the delivery of the schedule line been confirmed? Confirmed date: _______________________________________

1-3-3 Which item and schedule line categories have been determined?

Item category: _______________________________________

Schedule line category: _______________________________________

1-3-4 How does the schedule line category control this schedule line?

Item relev. for delivery _______________________________________

Movement type: _______________________________________

Requirements transfer: _______________________________________

Availability check: _______________________________________

Page 131: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 12

1-3-5 Try to deliver the order. Can you do it?

____________________________________________________________

1-3-6 Optional Which order screens contain information about the movement type and delivery blocks linked to schedule lines? Movement type: _________________________________ Delivery block: _______________________________________

1-4 Complete the following table:

Item Category MRP type Proposed schedule line

category

Manual schedule line

category

Manual schedule line

category

ItCa Typ SchLD MSLCa MSLCa

AFN

AFN ND

AGN

TAN

TAN VM

TANN ND

REN

KBN

KEN

1-5 Optional Which schedule line category does the sys tem determine for an item in item category TAN if the MRP type for the material is P3 (MRP fixing type -3-)? Schedule line category: _________________________________ Which search key does the system use? Key: _______________________________________

Page 132: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 13

Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Lines - Solutions

Unit: Controlling Sales Documents - Schedule Lines

1-1 Create the quotation

à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Quotation à Create

1-1-1 Quotation type: QT PO number: ##LO605-AG02 Valid to: one month from today

1-1-2 Select the item and choose Schedule lines for item.

1-1-3 Item category: AGN Standard item Schedule line category: CS Verbrg. MRP

1-1-4 Navigate to the definition of the schedule line category.

IMG → Sales and distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Define schedule line categories

Item relev. for delivery deactivated Req./Assembly deactivated Availability check deactivated

1-1-5 No. The schedule lines of the quotation are not relevant for delivery.

Page 133: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 14

1-2 Check the definition of the schedule line categories.

IMG → Sales and distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Define schedule line categories

Schedule Line

Category

Description Availability Transfer of requirement

s

Item relev. for delivery

Movement type

AT Inquiry schedule line - - - -

BN No MRP - - - -

BP Deterministic MRP x x - -

CN No MRP - - x 601

CP Deterministic MRP x x x 601

DN Returns - - x 651

1-3 Create the sales order.

1-3-1 Choose Create with reference and enter the number of the quotation.

1-3-2 Select the item and choose Schedule lines for item.

1-3-3 Item category: TAN Schedule line category: CV

1-3-4 Item rel. for del. x Movement type 601 GD goods issue: delivery Req./Assembly x Availability check x

1-3-5 Call the order and choose Sales document à Deliver.

Yes.

1-3-6 Optional

Select the item and choose Schedule lines for item. Select the item again and choose Schedule line details or press the Procurement or Shipping pushbutton.

The movement type is located on the Procurement tab page.

The delivery block is located on the Shipping tab page.

Page 134: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 15

1-4 Check the assignment of the schedule line categories.

IMG → Sales and distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Assign schedule line categories

Item Category MRP type Proposed

schedule line category

Manual schedule line

category

Manual schedule line

category

ItCa Typ SchLD MSLCa MSLCa

AFN AT BP

AFN ND AT

AGN BN BP

TAN CP

TAN VM CV

TANN ND CN

REN DN

KBN E1 E0

KEN CR CO

1-5 Optional

Schedule line category: CP

Key: Item category: TAN MRP type: Blank

No explicit entries are maintained for the item category and the MRP type in the assignment table.

In this case, the system checks whether an entry without a definition of the MRP type exists for the involved item category.

Page 135: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG 2003

Data Flow

l Create with reference

l Document flow

l Copying control and copying requirements

l Updating the reference status

Unit Contents:

Page 136: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG 2003

Data Flow: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

l Use document flow

l Understand and influence how data is passed between sales documents at header, item and schedule line level

l Use the completion rule for item categories to control documents created with reference

Page 137: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG 2003

Data Flow: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

0,--ORORLFLFCRCR

8. Special BusinessTransactions

9. Incomp-leteness

12. MaterialDetermination

2. OrganizationalUnits

4. Sales Document Type

11. OutlineAgreements

13. FreeGoods

6. Schedule Line Category

5. Item Category

1. Introduction

3. Sales Order Processing

10. PartnerDetermination

7. Data Flow

Page 138: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

SAP AG 2003

Data Flow: Business Scenario

l The different sales processes at your company, IDES AG, need to differentiate how they copy data from a preceding document to a subsequent document

l The status information in the preceding document also has to be controlled differently, depending on the process

l You need to model the processes as document flow lists

l It is your responsibility to figure out how the document flow, copying control, and status update work

Page 139: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 5

SAP AG 2003

Create with Reference: Dialog

Create With Reference X

Copy

Inquiry Billing Doc.Order ContractQuotation Sched. Agrmnt

Quotation

Requested delivery date

PO Number

Search Criteria

Sold-to party

Search

Item selection

200000546

n You can create a sales document with reference to a preceding document from both the initial screen and during document processing; the process is controlled using a uniform dialog box.

n The dialog box contains the six tab pages for Inquiry‚ Quotation, Order, Contract, Scheduling Agreement and Billing Document, from which you can choose one. The default tab page that appears when you first call up the screen has been determined by the system depending on the sales document category and the Mandatory Reference field.

n The system then determines the document number of the required reference document. n When you choose Copy, the system copies the reference document completely and if you choose

Item Selection you can select certain items and change the quantities before they are copied (see next slides).

Page 140: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 6

SAP AG 2003

Create with Reference: Item Selection (1)

Item102030

MaterialM1M2M3

Quantity4050

100

Deadline04/0101.04.01.04.

Price100.-150.-120.-

SD Document: 5376Sold-To Party: 1000Business Data

Page 141: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 7

SAP AG 2003

Create with Reference: Item Selection (2)

Item102030

MaterialM1M2M3

Quantity4050

100

X

X60

Copying Control

Selection List of Reference Doc.

SD Document: 5376Sold-To Party: 1000Business DataCreate With Reference

Document 5376

Copy Selection List

Dialog

Deadline04/0101.04.01.04.

Price100.-150.-120.-

SD Document: 5376Sold-To Party: 1000Business Data

Item102030

MaterialM1M2M3

Quantity4050

100

Page 142: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 8

SAP AG 2003

Create with Reference: Item Selection (3)

Item102030

MaterialM1M2M3

Quantity4050

100

X

X60

SD Document: 5435Sold-To Party: 1000Business Data

Item1030

MaterialM1M3

Quantity4060

Deadline06/2020.06.

Price100.-120.-

Copying Control

Selection List of Reference Doc.

SD Document: 5376Sold-To Party: 1000Business Data

Copy

Dialog

Deadline04/0101.04.01.04.

Price100.-150.-120.-

SD Document: 5376Sold-To Party: 1000Business Data Create With Reference

Document 5376

Selection List

Item102030

MaterialM1M2M3

Quantity4050

100

n You can create sales documents with reference to documents that already exist. n In the process, you can specify a different requested delivery date for the new document. This date is

set at the header level and for all referenced items in the new document. n You can use the Selection List button to select one or more items in the referenced document and

change the order quantities according to your customer's requirements. This allows you to copy partial quantities or all the items and quantities in the referenced document directly to the new one. Alternatively, you can also copy all the items and quantities directly from the preceding document.

n You can create with reference from both the initial screen and during document entry. This allows you to group several quotations for a customer together in a single order.

n You can create with reference for inquiries, quotations, sales orders, contracts, scheduling agreements and billing documents. To create with reference, you must first configure the corresponding copying controls. Please note that you should only configure these controls for logical business processes.

n Example: A free-of-charge subsequent delivery based on a sales order is appropriate An order based on a free-of-charge subsequent delivery is not appropriate

Page 143: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 9

SAP AG 2003

Create with Reference: Copy

Item102030

MaterialM1M2M3

Quantity4050

100

Deadline04/0101.04.01.04.

Price100.-150.-120.-

SD Document:Sold-To Party: 1000Business Data

Copy Selection list

Dialog

Deadline04/0101.04.01.04.

Price100.-150.-120.-

SD Document: 5376Sold-To Party: 1000Business Data Create With Reference

Document 5376Item102030

MaterialM1M2M3

Quantity4050

100

n When you create with reference using the "Copy" pushbutton in the dialog box, the full quantities of all items are copied to the subsequent document. This does not apply to items in the reference document that have been partially or fully completed.

Page 144: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 10

SAP AG 2003

Completion Rule and Reference Status

Inquiry

Item10

MaterialM1

Quantity10

Status: Fully referenced

Sold-To Party: C1

Quotation

Item10

MaterialM1

Quantity8

Status: Part. referenced

Sold-To Party: C1

Order

Item10

MaterialM1

Quantity6

Sold-To Party: C1

Copying Control:Update doc. flow x

Copying Control:Update doc. flow x

Item Category

AFNCompletion rule AItem complete after first reference

AFNCompletion rule AItem complete after first reference

AGNCompletion rule BItem complete when full quantity is ref.

AGNCompletion rule BItem complete when full quantity is ref.

TAN

n When you Create with reference to preceding documents, you frequently have to update the information about referred quantities or values. To do this, you have to check the Document flow update field at item level in copying control.

n In addition, if you want to restrict the reference to an item (for example, only until the full quantity in the preceding document has been referenced), set the appropriate Completion rule in the item category. The status of each item in the preceding document is updated separately, depending on the completion rule of the item category.

n Examples � Completion rule A:

An inquiry item is given "Completed" status as soon as it has been referred to in a quotation. This applies even if only part of the quantity in the quotation is copied. � Completion rule B:

A quotation item is not given "Completed" status until the complete quantity has been copied to the subsequent order. If only some of the quantity is copied, the quotation item is given the status "Partially referred". This allows you to continue creating orders from this item until the total quantity has been used up. � There are no additional completion rules for items in contracts.

n If you enter a reason for rejection, the item receives "Completed" status.

Page 145: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 11

SAP AG 2003

Document Flow - List

Document Flow of Quotation

Quotation. Order. . Delivery. . . Invoice. . Returns. . . Returns delivery. . . . Returns credit memo

Returns

Order Delivery Invoice

ReturnsDelivery

Returns Credit Memo

Quotation

..

.

n A sales process is made up of the sequence of individual process steps recorded as documents. This process chain is stored in the document flow.

n Document flows are updated for the overall document and for individual items. n You can view all of the documents within the document flow in a list. n In many cases, you can branch directly to the display of a document and then return to the document

flow. n In the status overview that can be displayed for each document in the document flow, you can

quickly find detailed information about the current status of the sales and distribution process. n Example: � Order -> Delivery status � Delivery -> Picking status

-> Billing status � Billing doc. -> Posting status

Page 146: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 12

SAP AG 2003

Copying Control in SD

Quotation (QT)

Standard Order (OR)

Delivery (LF)

Billing Document (F2)

allowed

allowed

allowed

n In copying control you determine which document types can be copied to another document type. Examples of this show how you can create a: � Sales document type from a sales doc. type e.g. Standard order (OR) <- Quotation (QT) � Sales document type from a billing doc. type e.g. Credit memo request (G2) <- Invoice (F2) � Delivery type from a sales document type e.g. Delivery (DL) <- Standard order (OR) � Billing doc. type from a sales doc. type e.g. Credit memo (G2) <- Credit memo request (G2) � Billing document type from a delivery type e.g. Invoice (F1) <- Delivery (DF) � Billing doc. type from a billing doc. type e.g. Invoice cancellation (S1) <- Invoice (F1)

n You determine the details of the copying procedure in copying control.

Page 147: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 13

SAP AG 2003

Copying Control for Sales Documents

SourceSource

Sched. Line

Item

HeaderIN Inquiry

QT Quotation

Sales Doc. Type

For IN -> QT

For IN -> QT

AFN Standard item

AFNN FOC item

Item Category

BP Mat. planning

Schedule Line Cat.

TargetTarget

QT Quotation

OR Stndrd order

Sales Doc. Type

AGN Standard item

AGNN FOC item

Item Category

Schedule Line Cat.

AT Inquiry sched. line

n You set up copying control for header, item and schedule line level to match the structure of your sales document.

n To control the copying procedure, at each level you create: � Data transfer routines

These routines control how fields are copied from the preceding document. � Copying requirements

Here you define requirements that are checked when you create a document with reference. If these requirements are not met in a particular case, the system issues a warning or error message and if necessary, terminates processing. � Switches

There are switches for setting specific controls for each transaction. For example, you can activate or deactivate the transfer of item numbers from the preceding document at the header level for sales documents.

n If you enter an invalid value or do not enter a target value at the item and schedule line level, the system determines the target from the assignment of the item or schedule line categories. Any value you enter must exist in the item or schedule line category assignment (as an alternative).

Page 148: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 14

SAP AG 2003

Copying Requirements

General dataHeader business dataPartner

Schedule line data

Quotation Standard Order

General dataHeader business dataPartner

General item dataItem business dataPartnerConditions

Schedule line data

If customer isthe same

If item is not

completed(completely copied

or rejected)

If open quantity

is greater than zero

General item dataItem business dataPartnerConditions

n You can store copying requirements at every level in copying control. Copying requirements contain the specific requirements for each business process and can be stored at every level. The reference document can only be created if all these requirements have been met.

n Examples of copying requirements that have been included in the SAP standard system are: � Header level

Copying requirement 001 checks, for instance, whether the sold-to party and the sales area in the source and target document are the same. � Item level

Copying requirement 301 checks, for instance, whether the item that is to be used as a copy has a reason for rejection or completed status. � Schedule line level

Copying requirement 501 ensures that only schedule lines with an open quantity greater than zero are copied.

n Note : Routines and requirements are written in ABAP/4 code and can be processed in Customizing in SD under System Modifications. Here you should check whether the existing objects are suitable. Normally you can adjust your system quickly by copying the objects in the standard system and deleting or adding lines of code to them.

Page 149: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 15

SAP AG 2003

Data Flow: Summary

You are now able to:

l Use document flow

l Understand and influence how data is passed on between sales documents at header, item and schedule line level

l Use the completion rule for item categories to control documents with reference

Page 150: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 16

Data Flow - Exercises

Unit: Data Flow

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Control how the completion status is updated between documents

• Track the data transfer between sales documents and adapt it to meet the specific requirements of a business process

In each step within a business process, you formulate requirements that become prerequisites for the next step.

For example, you can define that a quotation can only lead to an order when

• the sold-to party is identical in both documents or when

• the customer’s order lies within the validity period of the quotation

1-1 You receive a request for quotation (Inquiry number ##LO605-IN02) from customer T-S62A##. The customer requests 50 units each of materials T-ATA## and T-ATB##. The requested delivery date is the first day of the next month.

1-1-1 Enter the inquiry.

1-1-2 What is the status of the items in the inquiry?

Total processing Rejection status Reference status

Header

Item 10

Item 20

Page 151: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 17

1-1-3 After checking with your MRP controller, you know that you can offer the customer the requested quantity for material T-ATA##, but only 30 units of material T-ATB##. Enter a corresponding quotation (purchase number ##LO605-OT03) with reference to the inquiry. The quotation is valid for a month.

1-1-4 Which changes does the system make to the document status?

Total processing Rejection status Reference status

Inquiry

Header

Item 10

Item 20

Quotation

Header

Item 10

Item 20

1-1-5 Once your customer has checked the quotation, they order the first item with the complete quantity in the quotation, but initially only orders 20 units of the second item. Create the trade fair## order (purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##04).

1-1-6 Which changes are made to the status of the quotation?

Item

Total processing Rejection status Reference status

Header

Item 10

Item 20

1-1-7 Your customer then informs you that they don’t want the open quantity of item 20 in the quotation because the product is too expensive. Reject the item in the quotation and check the changes to the status.

Reason for rejection: _________________________________

Item

Total processing Rejection status Reference status

Header

Item 20

Page 152: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 18

1-2 Try to create another order with reference to the quotation.

1-2-1 Can you do it?

____________________________________________________________

Why or why not?

1-3 Optional

You decide in copying control whether the item numbers for the subsequent document should be copied from the preceding document.

1-3-1 Was the item numbering in the trade fair## order (purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##04) recalculated or taken from the quotation?

____________________________________________________________

1-3-2 Item numbering should be re-determined when you create an order for order type ZA## with reference to a quotation. Change the settings in copying control accordingly.

1-3-3 Create a quotation for customer T-S62A## that is valid for a month, with purchase order number ##LO605-OT04 and any two items. Enter an order, order type ZA##, with reference to this quotation (purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##05). Copy both items.

Check the item numbering in the quotation and the sales order.

Item numbers in quotation: _________________________________

Item numbers in order: _________________________________

Page 153: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 19

Data Flow - Solutions

Unit: Data Flow

1-1 Try out the Create with reference function.

1-1-1 Create the inquiry and save the document.

à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Inquiry à Create

1-1-2 à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Inquiry à Display

Choose Status overview.

Total processing Rejection status Reference status

Header Open Nothing rejected Not referenced

Item 10 Open Nothing rejected Not referenced

Item 20 Open Nothing rejected Not referenced

1-1-3 Create the quotation.

à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Quotation à Create

Choose Create with reference à Inquiry, enter the Inquiry number, choose Selection List, and reduce the quantity of the second item. Choose Copy.

1-1-4 à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Quotation à Display

Choose Document flow, select one of the documents, and choose Status overview.

Total processing Rejection status Reference status

Inquiry

Header Completed Nothing rejected Fully referenced

Item 10 Completed Nothing rejected Fully referenced

Item 20 Completed Nothing rejected Fully referenced

Quotation

Header Open Nothing rejected Not referenced

Item 10 Open Nothing rejected Not referenced

Item 20 Open Nothing rejected Not referenced

Page 154: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 20

1-1-5 Create the trade fair## order.

à Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Order à Create

Choose Create with reference à Quotation (tab), enter the quotation number, choose Selection List, and reduce the quantity of the second item. Choose Copy.

1-1-6 à Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Quotation à Display

Choose Status overview.

Item

Total processing Rejection status Reference status

Header Being processed Nothing rejected Partially referenced

Item 10 Completed Nothing rejected Fully referenced

Item 20 Being processed Nothing rejected Partially referenced

1-1-7 Choose Reason for rejection.

Reason for rejection: Too expensive

Item

Total processing Rejection status Reference status

Header Completed Partially rejected Partially referenced

Item 20 Completed Fully rejected Partially referenced

1-2 à Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Order à Create

Choose Create with Reference à Quotation (tab)

1-2-1 You cannot create the quotation because it is already completed.

The system displays the following message: The reference has already been completely copied or rejected.

1-3 Check the Customizing of copying control for sales documents.

1-3-1 Compare the two documents.

The document numbers have been copied from the quotation. Otherwise, the item numbers would be generated in increments of 100.

1-3-2 à IMG à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Maintain copying control for sales documents

Choose Copying control: Sales document to sales document

Choose Change.

Page 155: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 21

Choose Position. Target: ZA## Source: OR

Select the entry and choose Details.

Deselect field ”Copy item number” and save.

1-3-3 Verify the settings in the process.

Choose Create with Reference à Quotation.

The document numbers are re-determined in the order, and item numbers are generated in increments of 100.

Page 156: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG 1999

Special Business Transactions

l Cash Sales

l Rush deliveries

l Consignments

l Free-of-charge deliveries

Unit Contents:

Page 157: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG 1999

Special Business Transactions: Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

l Explain the differences between cash sales and rush orders and their special features

l Explain how customer consignments are represented in Customizing for Sales

l Control free-of-charge deliveries and subsequent free-of-charge deliveries

Page 158: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG 1999

Special Business Transactions: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

0,--ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data Flow

9. Incompletion

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

3. Sales Order Processing

10. Partnerdetermination

1. Introduction

8. Special Business Transactions

Page 159: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

SAP AG 1999

l Special business transactions occur regularly in the sales process at your company, IDES AG.

l You want to support these processes with the R/3 System.

l It is your responsibility to find out about the process variants that are modeled in the standard SAP System.

l In the process, you also want to find the control parameters for individual modifications.

Special Business Transactions: Business Scenario

Page 160: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 5

SAP AG 1999

Rush Orders

Sold-to party: C1

Item Material Quantity10 M1 1020 M2 20

Created automatically

DF - DeliveryDocument no.: 8000 0070

Imm. delivery: XDelivery type: LF

Sales document typeRO - Rush order

RO - Rush orderDocument number: 2973

Sold-to party: C1

Item Material Quantity10 M1 1020 M2 20

n Rush orders and cash sales are sales document types that are used in the sale s from plant process or for when the customer needs to pick up their goods immediately from the warehouse.

n In the sales document type for immediate delivery, the immediate delivery switch and delivery type DF are configured. When you save a rush order, the system automatically creates a delivery of type DF.

n Once the goods have been withdrawn from the warehouse, picking and posting goods issue can begin.

n When you create the billing documents (for example in collective processing), the system prints the invoice papers and sends them to the customer.

Page 161: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 6

SAP AG 1999

Cash Sales

Imm. delivery: XDelivery type: CS

Sales doc. type: CS - Cash sale

RD03

CS - Cash saleDoc. number: 2310

Sold-to party: C1

Item1020

MaterialM1M4

Quantity2010

CS - DeliveryDoc. no.: 8000 0397

Sold-to party: C1

Item1020

MaterialM1M4

Quantity2010

CS - Billing doc.Doc. no.: 9000 0071

Sold-to party: C1

Item1020

MaterialM1M4

Quantity2010

Invoice

Laser printerPrinter

Invoiceno.:2310 x

Createdautomat.

n In the sales document type for cash sales, the immediate delivery switch and delivery type CS are configured. When you save the cash sales, the system automatically creates a delivery of type CS and prints a document that can be given to the customer as an invoice.

n You control the invoice papers with output type RD03, contained in the output determination procedure for order type CS.

n Once the goods have been withdrawn from the warehouse, picking and posting goods issue can begin.

n An order-related billing index is generated automatically. This updates the billing due list. Billing type CS is created while the billing due list is being processed. The system does not print invoices during billing.

Page 162: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 7

SAP AG 2003

CustomerIDES AG 1000

Consignment Stores

Customer Special Stock

Ownership ofOwnership of

IDES AG 1000IDES AG 1000

CF

Consigmnt Fill-Upþ Orderþ Deliveryþ Pickingþ Goods issue¨ Billing doc.

Consignmnt Issueþ Orderþ Delivery¨ Pickingþ Goods issueþ Billing doc.

Customer Usage

CI

Consignmnt Returnsþ Orderþ Inbound delivery¨ Pickingþ Goods receiptþ Billing doc.

CRCP

Consignmnt Pick-Upþ Orderþ Inbound delivery¨ Pickingþ Goods receipt¨ Billing doc.

Plant 1200 Dresden

Storage Location 0001

Consignment Processing

n In consignment processing, goods are delivered to the customer but remain the property of the company until they are actually used. An invoice is not created until the customer withdraws the goods from the consignment stock. The customer has the right to return consignment goods up until that point.

n You process consignment fill-up with order type CF. The goods issue sets up a special stock at the customer's. However, the goods remain in the valuated stocks of the delivering plant. This transaction isn't billed because the consignment stock remains the property of your company.

n Consignment issue is processed with order type CI. When goods are issued, both the customer special stock and the stock in the delivering plant are reduced. This transaction is relevant for billing.

n If the customer returns the goods, you can represent this with order type CP (consignment pick-up). This transaction credits the special customer stock during the goods issue. Like the consignment fill-up, this transaction is not relevant for billing.

n If you want to reverse a consignment issue, you can process this with document type CR (consignment return). The goods issue sets up the special stock at the customer's again. A credit memo is generated based on the consignment returns.

Page 163: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 8

SAP AG 1999

Deliveries Free of Charge and Subsequent Deliveries

LF DeliveryDF Deliveryfree-of-charge

SDF Subs. del.free-of-charge

RE Returns

Reason for rejection 11

M1 10 PC KLN M1 10 PC

M1 10 PC KLN M1 10 PCM1 10 PC REN

LF Delivery

n You create a delivery free-of-charge document, for example, when you want to send your customer a sample.

n You enter a subsequent delivery free-of-charge document, for example, when you need to deliver material for an order due to a complaint.

n Customizing for sales document type SDF determines that this transaction requires a preceding document. The relevant copying controls must be set up for all preceding documents that might be used, for example, copying control for SDF from a RE (returns order).

n By activating a delivery block in the sales document type, you ensure that delivery free-of-charge or subsequent delivery free-of-charge transactions are not released for delivery until they have been checked by the relevant employee. If the employee decides that the delivery should not take place, s/he can maintain a relevant reason for rejection in the sales document.

n In Customizing for item categories, you determine that items in sales document types DF and SDF are free of charge (for example with KLN or KLX). You can also decide what happens to these items with regard to pricing and billing.

Page 164: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 9

SAP AG 1999

Special Business Transactions: Summary

You are now able to:

l Explain the differences between cash sales and rush orders and their special features

l Explain how customer consignments are represented in Customizing for Sales

l Control free-of-charge deliveries and subsequent free-of-charge deliveries

Page 165: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 10

Special Business Transactions - Exercises

Unit: Special Business Transactions

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Explain how complex business processes such as consignment processing are handled

• Explain how to control document types DF and SDF

Consignment processing offers your partners great advantages. Your customers manage the consignment stock themselves and can access the goods in the consignment warehouse at any time. They do not have to pay until the goods are issued and then only for the amount that has been issued.

There are two different cases that involve dispatching goods free of charge to the customers: The free of charge delivery of advertising materials and subsequent delivery within returns processing.

1-1 You agree to make material T-ATE## available immediately as consignment goods for customer T-S62A## .

Note: Check the stocks (plant 1200) in another session mode. You can call up the stock overview with the following menu path:

→ Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management → Environment → Stock → Stock overview

1-1-1 Check the consignment material stock. Unrestricted use: _________________________________ Customer Consignment: _________________________________

Page 166: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 11

1-1-2 Send 100 units of the material to the customer’s consignment warehouse by entering a consignment fill-up (purchase order number ##LO605-CF01). Don’t forget to create a delivery and a transfer order and to post goods issue.

Notes:

1) Create the delivery directly from the order. Menu path: → Sales document → Deliver

2) Create a transfer order directly from the delivery. Menu path: Next functions → Create transfer request

3) Use the following settings: – Warehouse number: 12 Lean warehouse Dresden – Foreground/background: background – Adopt pick. quantity: 2 (copy picked quantity to delivery as delivery quantity and post GI)

1-1-3 Check the consignment material stock. Unrestricted use: _________________________________ Customer Consignment: _________________________________

1-1-4 Optional Try to create a billing document from the delivery document. Can you do it? _________________________________ Why or why not? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

1-1-5 The customer informs you that they have used 50 units of the material in the consignment warehouse. Enter a consignment issue (purchase order number ##LO605-CI01). Deliver the order and post goods issue.

Note: You can post the goods issue directly from the delivery, as the goods do not physically move in your warehouse (no transfer order required). Create the delivery directly from the order. Post the goods issue directly from the delivery.

Menu path: → Edit → Post goods issue

1-1-6 Check the consignment material stock.

Page 167: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 12

Unrestricted use: _________________________________ Customer Consignment: _________________________________

1-1-7 Optional

Bill the consignment issue. Can you do it? _________________________________ Why or why not? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

1-1-8 The customer informs you that they don’t need the remaining consignment goods. Enter a consignment pick-up (purchase order number ##LO605-CP01).

Deliver the order and post a goods issue.

1-1-9 Check the consignment material stock.

Unrestricted use: _________________________________ Customer Consignment: _________________________________

1-1-10 Optional

Bill the consignment pick-up. Can you do it? _________________________________ Why or why not? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

1-2 Optional

Display consignment fill-up and consignment issue with purchase order numbers ##LO605-CF01 and ##LO605-CI01. Which item and schedule line categories did the system determine?

Item Category Schedule Line Cat.

Consignment fill-up

Consignment issue

Page 168: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 13

1-3 Optional

How and why are these schedule line categories different from each other? __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________

1-4 What are the differences in Customizing for sales document types DF and SDF? __________________________________________________________________ How can you ensure that the items in documents of this type are really delivered free of charge? __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________

Page 169: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 14

Special Business Transactions - Solutions

Unit: Special Business Transactions

1-1 You agree with your customer to make a material available immediately as a consignment good.

1-1-1 Check the consignment material stock.

à?Logistics à Materials management à Inventory management à Environment à Stock à Stock overview

Unrestricted use: 2000 Consignment stock: 0

1-1-2 Consignment fill-up

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order à Create Order type: CF Consignment fill-up

à Sales document à Deliver à Subsequent Function à Transfer order

1-1-3 Check the consignment material stock.

Unrestricted use: 1900 Consignment stock: 100

1-1-4 Optional

Try to create a billing document from the delivery document. Can you do it?

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Billing à Billing document à Create à Enter document number of delivery

No.

Log: The document is not relevant for billing. Cause: Billing has not been defined in Customizing for consignment fill-ups. There are no default values for sales document type CF for order- and delivery-related billing documents. Item category KBN is not relevant for billing.

1-1-5 Consignment issue

Page 170: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 15

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order à Create Order type: KE Consignment issue

à Sales document à Deliver à Edit à Post goods issue

1-1-6 Check the consignment material stock.

Unrestricted use: 1900 Consignment stock: 50

1-1-7 Optional

Bill the consignment issue. Can you do it?

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Billing à Billing document à Create à Enter document number of delivery

Yes

Cause: A delivery-related billing document has been defined for item category KEN in Customizing. Billing document type F2 has been proposed for delivery-related billing in sales document type CI.

1-1-8 Consignment pick-up

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order à Create Order type: KA Consignment pick-up

Deliver the order and post a goods issue.

à Sales document à Deliver à Edit à Post goods issue

1-1-9 Check the consignment material stock.

Unrestricted use: 1950 Consignment stock: 0

1-1-10 Optional

Bill the consignment pick-up. Can you do it?

No.

Why or why not?

Log: A billing type could not be determined. Cause: Billing has not been defined for the consignment pick-up. There are no default values for sales document type CP for order- and delivery-related billing documents. Delivery type LR does not contain a default order type from which alternative default values for order- and delivery-related billing documents could be determined. In addition, item category KAN is not relevant for billing.

Page 171: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 16

1-2 Optional Display the consignment fill-up and the consignment issue. Which item and schedule line categories did the system determine?

Item Category Schedule Line Cat.

Consignment fill-up KBN E0

Consignment issue KEN CO

1-3 Optional

How and why are these schedule line categories different from each other?

Schedule line category E0: Movement type 631 (GI consignment lending) Schedule line category C0: Movement type 633 (GI Issue consignment customer)

During the fill-up, the affected stocks are moved from unrestricted use stocks to the customer’s consignment stocks (special stocks). The goods remain in the customer’s possession. Consignment issue posts the goods from the special stock and they become the property of the customer.

1-4 What are the differences in Customizing for sales document types DF and SDF?

Entry C in the Reference mandatory field means that document type SDF can only be created with reference to an order.

The item categories for these order types are not relevant for billing.

Page 172: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG 1999

Incompletion

l Incompletion log

l Incompletion status

l Incompletion procedure

l Lists of incomplete orders

Unit Contents:

Page 173: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG 1999

Incompletion: Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

l Explain the incompletion log and process incomplete orders

l Adjust the incompletion log in Customizing to meet your requirements

Page 174: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG 1999

Incompletion: Course Overview Diagram

§

0,--ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special Business

Transactions

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

3. Sales Order Processing

10. Partnerdetermination

1. Introduction

9. Incompletion

XYZ/99XYZ/99M1M1 -?--?-

Page 175: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

SAP AG 1999

Incompleteness: Business Scenario

l A variety of information is required to ensure that the sales processes at your company run smoothly.

l The amount of information required can differ depending on the process.

l It is your responsibility to configure the system in such a way to make sure that people can verify that the document data is complete during document entry.

l You want to control which subsequent functions of the document are blocked depending on which information is missing in the document.

Page 176: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 5

SAP AG 1999

Incompleteness Log

Sold-to party: C1Order number: ---

F2F2

F3F3

Is called up:a) Automatically when savedb) Through the menu

F5F5

Order

Order: Incompleteness Log x

Item

10

Missing dataPO numberRouteSchedule line

Item 10Material: M3Route: ---

Schedule line

Schedule line

Item 20Material: M2Route: 00001

n An incompleteness log is a list of all the data essential to your company in a sales document that has not yet been entered in the system.

n You can define these data fields in Customizing for the incompleteness log. n The system goes directly from the incompleteness log to the different views where you can then edit

the incomplete data.

Page 177: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 6

SAP AG 1999

Lists of Incomplete Orders

Start

Review data

ListOrder 4231Order 6574Order 7019

Order: 6574Sold-to party: C1

Material

M1

M4

Quantity

10

15

Item

10

20

Save

Selection

Incomplete orders

Selection viaCreated by LO605-##

n Every employee can list all of the incomplete sales orders that they have created. They can also display certain documents that have been blocked for a particular step in a selection screen, such as a list of all the documents blocked for shipping due to incompleteness.

n Incomplete orders can be then called up from the list and completed. When you have finished processing, the system automatically returns to the list of incomplete documents.

Page 178: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 7

SAP AG 2003

Incomplete Sales Documents

Incompleteness dialog

Sales document type

The document mustbe completely

maintained

YesStill

possible to save document ?

Sales document

Sold-to party:C1 Smith New York

Is documentcomplete ?

NoYes

No

Block subsequent functions in document:

For example: - Create w/ reference - Shipping- Billing document

n In Customizing for sales document types, the incomplete messages field allows you to control whether incomplete sales documents can be saved or not. If this switch is not set, then the further course of the business process is determined from the status groups of the incompleteness procedure.

n The procedure controls what effects the incomplete data has on the process. n Examples � If the terms of payment are missing, the order can be delivered but it cannot be billed. At the same

time, you will not be able to create a new order with reference to an incomplete order. � The incompleteness log tells you if the purchase order number is missing, but you can continue to

process the document.

Page 179: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 8

SAP AG 1999

Controlling the Incompleteness Log

Assignment

Procedure

Incompleteness log

Sales document header

Sales document item

Sales document schedule line

10 Inquiry and quotation

11 Order

...Purchase order numberCurrency Terms of payment

Sales doc. type Procedure

QT QuotationOR Standard orderZO Z order

101111

n The incompleteness log differentiates between the following levels: � Sales document header � Sales document item � Sales document schedule line

n In each procedure you determine which fields are checked for completion. n You determine areas of validity by assigning procedures.

For example, you can assign the incompleteness procedure for the sales document header, using the sales document type. � Procedure at header level -> Sales document type � Procedure at item level -> Item category � Procedure at schedule line level -> Schedule line category

n You can also flag partner functions, texts and condition types in pricing as mandatory. If these entries are then missing, a note will appear in the incompleteness log.

Page 180: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 9

SAP AG 1999

Status of Incomplete Sales Documents

0101

0202

0303

...

..

.

General Delivery Billing Pricing(Sales)General Delivery Billing Pricing(Sales)

X

65Order Field Status group

PO number 01Currency 03Terms of payment 03

Procedure

X

X

X

X

Statusgroup

n Incomplete document data affects further processing in different ways. A status group is assigned to each field in the incompleteness procedure.

n When you define the status groups, you decide which steps should be prevented if data is missing. n Examples � Incomplete for delivery -> No delivery is possible � Incomplete for billing -> No billing is possible � Incomplete for pricing -> No order confirmation or billing are possible

n A status group can contain any number of these effects. n This allows you to control the effect of incomplete data separately for each field.

Page 181: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 10

SAP AG 1999

Incompletion: Summary

You are now able to:

l Explain the incompletion log and process incomplete orders

l Adjust the incompletion log in Customizing to meet your requirements

Page 182: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 11

Incompleteness - Exercises

Unit: Incompleteness

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Use the incompleteness log for sales documents during document processing and control it in Customizing

1.

The incompleteness log ensures that you cannot continue with certain steps in the business process when essential data is missing.

1-1 You would like to ensure that sales documents of type ZA## cannot be left incomplete in sales order processing.

1-1-1 Create an order with order type ZA## for customer T-S62A## and material T-ATA## (10 units) and save the document without a purchase order number. Can you do it? _________________________________

1-1-2 Activate the Incomplete. messages indicator for sales document type ZA##.

1-1-3 Create another order with order type ZA## for customer T-S62A## and material T-ATA## (10 units) and save the document without a purchase order number. Can you do it? _________________________________

1-1-4 Process the incompleteness log by maintaining purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##07. Save the document.

1-1-5 Delete the Incomplet. messages indicator for this sales document type.

Page 183: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 12

1-2 You want to ensure that the name of the contact person (Document header: Tab page Purchase Order Data, Field Name) who is responsible for the sales order is always entered in trade fair orders.

1-2-1 Create incompleteness procedure Y# with description Order procedure ## (key of the new procedure for each student group: see the following table):

Key: Y# (see the following table!) Description Order procedure ##

Key of the new procedure for each student group (ignore the system message regarding the namespace conventions):

Group number

Proced. Group number

Proced. Group number

Proced.

01 YA 07 YG 13 YM

02 YB 08 YH 14 YN

03 YC 09 YI 15 YO

04 YD 10 YJ 16 YP

05 YE 11 YK 17 YQ

06 YF 12 YL 18 YR

1-2-2 Copy the field for the ordering party’s name BNAME from table VBAK into the procedure. This field will be displayed in the KBES Header - Purchase order data sales order screen. If the ordering party’s name is missing in the sales document, the system should not create a delivery. Assign a corresponding status group.

1-2-3 Assign incompleteness procedure Y# to sales document type ZA##.

1-3 Create an order with order type ZA## for customer T-S62A## and material T-ATA## (10 units).

1-3-1 Save the incomplete order.

1-3-2 Try to deliver the order. Set the selection date to a month from today. What message appears? _________________________________

1-3-3 Change the order and edit the incompleteness log.

Page 184: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 13

1-3-4 Try to deliver the order again. Can you do it? _________________________________

Page 185: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 14

Incompleteness - Solutions

Unit: Incompleteness

1-1 You would like to ensure that sales documents of type ZA## cannot be left incomplete in sales order processing.

1-1-1 Create an order and save it without entering a purchase order number. Can you do it?

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create

Yes, the document can be saved even though not all data is complete.

1-1-2 Set the Incomplet. messages indicator in sales order type ZA## (select the IC dialog field)

IMG à Sales and Distribution à Sales à Sales Documents à Sales Document Header àDefine sales document types à Select document type ZA## à Activate indicator à Save

1-1-3 Create an order and save it without entering a purchase order number. Can you do it?

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create

No

1-1-4 Edit the incompleteness log and save the document.

à Button: Complete data à Enter the purchase order number à Back à Save

1-1-5 Delete the Incomplet. messages indicator for this sales document type. (delete the indicator you set above in field IC dialog) à see above (1-1-2)

1-2 You want to ensure that the name of the contact person who is responsible for the sales order is always entered in trade fair orders.

Page 186: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 15

1-2-1 Create incompleteness procedure Y# (key of the new procedure for each student group: see table in unit ”Exercises”):

IMG à Sales and Distribution à Basic Functions à Incompleteness à Define Incompleteness Procedures à Select group A à Dialog structure: Procedures à Button: Change à Button: New entries

1-2-2 Add the field for the ordering party’s name to the procedure and assign it a status group.

à Dialog structure: Fields à Button: New entries à Maintain entries Status group: 02 à Save à Exit

Note: You can determine the names of tables and fields in the sales document by placing the cursor on the relevant field, pressing F1 and pressing the button: Technical info. (Document header: Tab page Purchase Order Data, Field Name)

1-2-3 Assign incompleteness procedure Y# to sales document type ZA##.

IMG à Sales and Distribution à Basic Functions à Log of incomplete items… àAssign incompleteness procedures à Assign procedures to sales document types à Maintain entries à ?Save à Exit

1-3 Create Order

1-3-1 Save the incomplete order.

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create

1-3-2 Try to deliver the order. What message appears?

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Change order à Sales document à Deliver

Message: The order cannot be delivered Log: Order is incomplete (please maintain)

1-3-3 Change the order and edit the incompleteness log.

Logistics à Sales and Distribution à Sales à ?Order à Change à Edit à Log of incomplete items à Select the ordering party’s name à Button: Complete data à Back

1-3-4 Try to deliver the order again. Can you do it?

Page 187: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 16

à Sales document à Deliver

Yes, the order can be delivered.

Page 188: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG 1999

Business Partners and Partner Determination

l Partner functions

l Partner types

l Partner determination procedure

Unit Contents:

Page 189: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG 1999

Partner Determination: Topic Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to

l Name the most important criteria for determining business partners

l Set up new business partners in Customizing

l Include additional business partners in the sales process

Page 190: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG 1999

Partner Determination: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

0,--ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special Business

Transactions

9. Incompletion

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

3. Sales Order Processing

1. Introduction

10. Partnerdetermination

Page 191: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

SAP AG 1999

Partner Determination: Business Scenario

l As part of your efforts to improve customer service, you want to assign each of your customers a sales employee as their own personal representative.

l This information should be available automatically in your sales documents.

l Your company is also investigating whether you can evaluate this data, to obtain the criteria for awarding performance bonuses to your staff.

Page 192: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 5

SAP AG 1999

Business Partners

Market

Customer

Vendor Customer

Contactperson

Contactperson

Company

Employee

Employee

1

1 2

2

34

5

6

n Different business partners with different business relationships with each other all exist within a marketplace.

n Examples of business partners are: � Customer � Vendor � Employee � Contact person

n Examples of business relationships are: � 1. Vendor-customer: The vendor acts as the forwarding agent to the customer � 2. Contact person - customer: The contact person is employed at the customer's company � 3. Contact person - customer: The contact person is the customer's consultant but does not work

in the same company � 4. Customer-customer: Sold-to party and ship-to party are different people � 5. Employee - contact person: Contact person is looked after individually � 6. Employee - customer: Customer manager

Page 193: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 6

SAP AG 1999

Partner types

Create soldCreate sold--to partyto party

Partner functions

Contact person

Sold-to party

Sales employee

Contact partner number

Customer number

Personnel number

Sold-to party Ship-to party

Partner Partner functionfunction

Payer

Forwarding agent

Vendor

Buyer

= Customer

= Employee

= Vendor= Contact person

Contactperson

Representative

Salespersonnel

n The business partners that exist in the marketplace are represented with a partner type in the R/3 System.

n Partner types AP, KU, LI and PE are defined in partner processing for the Sales and Distribution application module. These are defined as follows: � AP Contact person � KU Customer � LI Vendor � PE Personnel

In other applications (such as Service Management) different partner types have been defined (for example, O for organizational unit, S for position, A for work center).

Page 194: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 7

SAP AG 1999

Partner Functions

FA Forwarding agent

SH Ship-to party

PY Payer

ER Employeeresponsible BP Bill-to party

. . . . .

SP Sold-to party

AP Contact person

BusinessBusinesspartnerpartner

n While the partner types allow us to distinguish between different business partners, the partner functions represent the roles they play within the business transaction. � For example, different customers (customer partners) can assume certain roles in a business

transaction. The customer who places the order does not necessarily have to be the same customer who receives the goods or the customer who is responsible for paying the invoice.

n Assigning partner functions in the SAP system determines the function(s) of particular partners in the sales process. One partner may take on several functions. � In the simplest case, all the partner functions within the customer partner type would be assigned

to one business partner, in other words, the same customer would be the sold-to party, ship-to party, payer and bill-to party.

n You can enter contact persons for a customer directly in the customer master and they are automatically assigned to that customer. The contact person can also be assigned to another customer, for example, in a consultant role.

n The forwarding agent is an example of a vendor. n Employees of your own company (such as sales representatives or clerks) are managed in the

employee master records. They can assume partner functions of partner type "Personnel", such as partner function ER, responsible employee.

Page 195: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 8

SAP AG 1999

Partners in the Sales Process

Partner functions:SP Sold-to party: C1BP Bill-to party: C1PY Payer: C1SH Ship-to party: C1, C2, C3

HEADERSP : C1 PY : C1SH : C2 PY : C1

ITEM 1

ITEM 2

SH : C2 C3

Proposal

+ selection

Changes possible ifpartner function SH isconfigured at item level

Also valid for items unless

agreed to otherwise

Customer master

Order

n You can maintain partner relationships both in sales documents and in the master data. Partner relationships are usually already defined in the customer master. They are proposed automatically in the document header when you create a sales document. � If Customizing permits it, you can change or supplement these relationships manually by going to

the partner screen and changing the function assignment. n In Customizing, you decide whether several partners can be assigned to one partner function in the

customer master. If multiple partners of the same function are maintained, when you then enter a sales order, a selection list appears containing these partners.

n In the sales documents, the system has been configured so that only one partner can be assigned to each partner function. The only exception is for outline agreements (partner functions AA and AW).

n You can also define partners at item level in the sales documents. However, business partners that are only defined in the header cannot be changed at item level.

n You can determine which partner functions must be entered (mandatory functions). n You can prohibit anyone from changing a partner that has already been entered (for example, you

could indicate the sold-to party cannot be changed in the sales document). n It is also possible to enter or change the address of a partner, such as the ship-to party, manually.

This change does not affect the master record.

Page 196: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 9

SAP AG 1999

Partner Determination Procedure (1)

Customer masterSales document headerSales document itemDelivery Billing headerBilling itemSales activity (CAS)

Page 197: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 10

SAP AG 1999

Partner Determination Procedure (2)

Procedure for sales documents

Customer masterSales document headerSales document itemDelivery Billing headerBilling itemSales activity (CAS)

Procedure for customer master records

(1)(1) (1)(1)

AG Sold-to partyRG PayerWE Ship-to party

TA Standard orderSM Product proposalKAB Release order

Page 198: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 11

SAP AG 1999

Partner Determination Procedure (3)

Procedure for sales documents

AG Sold-to partyRG PayerWE Ship-to party

Customer masterSales document headerSales document itemDelivery Billing headerBilling itemSales activity (CAS)

TA Standard orderSM Product proposalKAB Release order

Procedure for customer master records

Sold-to partyShip-to partyPayerSales partner Forwarding agent. . .

(2)(2)(2)(2)

(1)(1) (1)(1)

Possible partner functions

Page 199: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 12

SAP AG 1999

Partner Determination Procedure (4)

Procedure for sales documents

SP Sold-to partyPY PayerST Ship-to party

Customer masterSales document headerSales document itemDelivery Billing headerBilling itemSales activity (CAS)

OR Standard orderSM Product proposalKAB Release order

QT QuotationOR Standard orderDF Free-of-charge delivery. . .

0001 Sold-to party0100 Distribution centerCPD One-time customers. . .

Assign to document type

Procedure for customer master records

Assign to account group

Sold-to partyShip-to partyPayerSales partner Forwarding agent. . .

Defined partnerfunctions

(2)(2)

(3)(3)

(2)(2)

(3)(3)

(1)(1) (1)(1)

n Partners appear in the system at different levels, such as the customer master, in the sales document header, in the sales document items, and so on.

n You can define your own partner determination procedures for each of these levels. n A partner determination procedure is where you determine which partner functions should or must

appear. n You determine areas of validity by assigning procedures.

For example, you use the account group to assign the partner determination procedure for the customer master. The partner procedures are assigned to the partner objects as follows: � Partner object Assignment key � Customer master -> Account group � Sales document header -> Sales doc. type � Sales document item -> Item category in sales � Delivery -> Delivery type � Shipment -> Shipment type � Billing header -> Billing type � Billing item -> Billing type � Sales activities (CAS) -> Sales activity type

Page 200: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 13

SAP AG 1999

Customer Master and Account Group

0001 Sold-to party

0002 Ship-to party

0003 Payer

0004 Bill-to party

Field selectionNumber assignmentOne-time account: Yes/NoProposed message

ACCOUNT GROUP 0001

Create sold-to party

Customer : C1

Sales organization : 1000

Distribution channel : 10

Division : 00

Account group : 0001

ACCOUNT GROUP

n The account group controls the amount of data and the response of customer master records. Account groups are already defined in the standard SAP system, such as account group 0001 Sold-to party, 0002 Ship-to party, 0003 Payer, and so on. . . You can create additional account groups as necessary.

n When you define the account group, you determine: � For each data field, whether it is displayed or not and whether maintenance is mandatory, optional,

or not possible � The number range � A number of other control elements, such as for partners and texts of the customer master

n Example: A customer master record for a customer that only acts as a ship-to party (created with account group 0002) requires the information relevant for shipping. The billing information is not required, which is why the corresponding fields are not displayed.

n In contrast to the account group, which controls a customer master record, the partner function determines which partner assumes specific business functions within the sales process.

Page 201: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 14

SAP AG 1999

Permitted Partner Functions per Account Groups

Partner function SP à Account group 0001, 0005, CPD,...

Account group (Definition)

0001 Sold-to party0002 Ship-to party0003 Payer0004 Bill-to party0005 Prospective customer0007 Sales partner. . .

Partner function (definition)

SP Sold-to partySH Ship-to partyPY PayerBP Bill-to partyCP Contact personFA Forwarding agent. . .

In which account group can customersassume the role of the sold-to party?

In which account group can customersassume the role of the ship-to party?

Partner function SH à Account group 0001, 0002, CPD,...

n For organized sales processing, it is important that each customer is only used for the functions within a document that have been assigned to him or her. You can guarantee this by assigning permitted partner functions to each account group.

n If you choose partner type customer for a new partner function, you then have to determine which of your customers can be entered for this partner type.

n Because you control the customers through the account group, you assign all the defined partner functions to each account group. As a result, the account group of a customer also controls the possible partner functions.

n Examples from the standard system: � Customers in the following account groups can be sold-to parties:

0001, 0005, 0007, CPD, and so on . . � Customers in account groups 0002 (ship-to party), 0003 (payer) or 0004

(bill-to party) cannot be sold-to parties.

Page 202: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 15

SAP AG 1999

Partner Determination for Sales Documents

Order

Sold-to party:C1 Smith New York

Partners

SP C1 Smith NYSH S1 Smith SFPY P1 Smith HQ. . .. . .

?Origin

Customerhierarchy

KNVH

Creditrepresentative

T024P

System user

Customer master

KNVP

Contactperson

KNVK

n When you create sales documents, the business partners are automatically copied from the customer master. In the process, the customer master of the sold-to party is accessed.

n Several partner relationships are stored in the customer master record for a sold-to party. The system can also copy a partner function from other customer master records to create a partner for the sales document by specifying the source of the partner function and the determination sequence. When you do, you should note the sequence in which the system determines the partners. � Example of indirect partner functions:

You have different regular suppliers in different regions. You want the system to determine the forwarding agent in the sales document dependent on the ship-to party. In Customizing, you determine that the system determines the ship-to party first by accessing the master record for the sold-to party. Then it accesses the ship-to party's master record to determine the forwarding agent.

n You can also use other sources to automatically determine business partners in sales documents, such as the tables for customer hierarchy (KNVH), contact persons (KNVK), credit representatives (T024P), and so on. . .

n An analysis function is available for tracing the automatic determination of business partners in sales documents in detail.

Page 203: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 16

SAP AG 1999

Partner Determination: Unit Summary

You are now able to:

l Name the most important criteria for determining business partners

l Set up new business partners in Customizing

l Include additional business partners in the sales process

Page 204: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 17

Business Partners and Partner Determination - Exercises

Unit: Business Partners and Partner Determination

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Include and control your own business partners in the master data and business processes

Your company wants to improve their customer care. Therefore, you would like to assign a personal representative to important customers, such as customer T-S62C##, who would then be responsible for ensuring that the business transactions with that customer run smoothly.

1-1 Enter a new partner function 9# for the personal representative in Customizing. (Key of the new role for each student group: see the following table):

Key: 9# (see the following table!) Description: Representative ## Partner type: PE

Keys of the new function for each student group:

Group number

Partner function

Group number

Partner function

Group number

Partner function

01 9A 07 9G 13 9M

02 9B 08 9H 14 9N

03 9C 09 9I 15 9O

04 9D 10 9J 16 9P

05 9E 11 9K 17 9Q

06 9F 12 9L 18 9R

Page 205: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 18

1-2 Create a new partner determination procedure Z## with description Procedure ## for object ”customer master”.

Enter the following partner functions:

– SP Sold-to party (cannot be changed, mandatory function) – SP Ship-to party (mandatory function) – PY Ship-to party (mandatory function) – BP Payer (mandatory function) – 9# Representative ##

Customer T-S62C##’s master record is controlled by account group ZK##. Assign the new procedure to account group ZK##.

1-3 Extend the customer master record for customer T-S62C## with the personal representative.

Note: In the master data menu for Sales, choose: → Business partners → Customers → Change → Sales and Distribution → Button: Sales area data; Sales tab card: Partner functions Enter employee 1701## in the partner screen as the personal representative and save the master record.

1-4 Optional

In the next step, verify that the new partner in the master record will be automatically controlled in document type ZA##.

1-4-1 Create a new partner determination procedure Y## with description Order procedure ## for object ”sales document type”.

1-4-2 Enter the following partner functions:

– SP Sold-to party (cannot be changed, mandatory function) – SH Ship-to party (mandatory function) – BP Bill- to party (mandatory function) – PY Payer (mandatory function) – 9# Representative ## (mandatory function) – SE Sales employee

1-4-3 Assign the new procedure to sales document type ZA##.

Page 206: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 19

1-5 Optional

Determine whether the partner function 9# Representative ## was automatically transferred from the customer master record to the order.

1-5-1 Create a trade fair## order for customer T-S62C## (purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##06). Determine whether the partner function 9# representative ## has been stored as a partner in the order header.

1-5-2 Also enter an employee called Hubert Schwarz as the sales employee.

1-5-3 Can you determine the sales employee from the sold-to party’s master record? _________________________________ Why or why not? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

Page 207: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 20

Business Partners and Partner Determination - Solutions

Unit: Business Partners and Partner Determination

1-1 Create a new partner function

IMG à Sales and Distribution à? Partner Determination à? Set Up Partner Determination à? Set Up Partner Determination for Customer Master à? Partner Functions Folder (Double-click) à? Button: New entries à??Create partner function 9# à ?Save

1-2 Create new partner determination procedure for customer master data

à Partner Determination Procedures (Double-click) à Button: New entries à??Create partner determination procedure 9# à??Save

à Select procedure Z## à Partner Functions in Procedure Folder (Double-click) à Button: New Entries à Enter Function à Save

à Partner Determination Procedure Assignment (Double-click) à Assign account group ZK## the partner procedure Z## à Save

1-3 Extend the customer master record for customer T-S62C## with the personal representative.

?à Business partners à Customer à? Change à? Sales and distribution à Button: Sales area data à?? Sales tab card: Partner function à Partner function: Add representative ##

1-4 Optional

Create a new partner determination procedure for object “Sales document header”

1-4-1 IMG à?Sales and Distribution à?Partner Determination à ?Set Up Partner Determination à ?Set Up Partner Determination for Customer Master à ?Partner Functions Folder (Double-click) à?Button: New entries à ?Create partner determination procedure Y## à ?Save

1-4-2 Create partner function

à Select procedure Y## à Partner Functions in Procedure Folder (Double-click) à Button: New Entries à Enter Functions à Save

Page 208: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 21

1-4-3 Assign procedure

à Partner Determination Procedure Assignment (Double-click) à Assign Sales document type ZA## the partner procedure Y## à Save

1-5 Optional

Check whether the new partner function was automatically transferred from the customer master record to the order.

1-5-1 Create Order

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type: ZA##) à Create

1-5-2 Create the sales representative

à Goto à Header à Partners à Search for the employee using a matchcode

1-5-3 Can you determine the sales employee from the sold-to party’s master record?

No.

Why or why not?

Partner procedure Z##, which controls this customer, does not contain this function. As a result, you cannot save the function of the sales employee in the customer’s master record. This means that the system cannot use the customer master to propose this partner in the sales document.

Page 209: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG 2003

Outline Agreements

l Scheduling agreement

l Quantity contract

l Value contract

l Partners authorized to release

l Contract data and rental contracts

Unit Contents:

Page 210: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG 2003

Outline Agreements: Unit Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

l Use different types of outline agreements and their functions

l Configure outline agreements in Customizing so that they meet your requirements

Page 211: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG 2003

Outline Agreements: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

0,--ORORLFLFCRCR

7. Data Flow8. Special Business

Transactions

9. Incomp-leteness

12. MaterialDetermination

2. OrganizationalUnits

4. Sales Document Type

11. OutlineAgreements

13. FreeGoods

6. Schedule Line Category

5. Item Category

3. Sales Order Processing

10. PartnerDetermination

1. Introduction

§§

Page 212: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

SAP AG 2003

Outline Agreements: Business Scenario

l Your company, IDES AG, has excellent business relationships with many of its customers, and conducts frequent transactions with them.

l Together with these customers, your company wants to plan the business processes for the future based on contractual agreements.

l Different types of outline agreements will be needed, depending on the product and the customer involved.

l It is your responsibility to find out the extent to which the different outline agreements can be modelled using the available sales document types in the SAP R/3 System.

Page 213: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 5

SAP AG 2003

Contracts - Sales Document Types

Outline Agreements

Scheduling Agreements

• SA Schedulingagreement

• BL Sched. agrmnt w. del. sched.

• DEL Sched. agrmnt for external agent

• . . .

Contracts

• NMS Quantity contract

• WK1 General valuecontract

• WK2 Material-related value contract

• RC Rental contract

• SC Service and maintenance

n Outline agreements play an important role in nearly all business processes. Customers and vendors agree on the goods to be provided under certain conditions and within a specific timeframe. Outline agreements streamline business processes for both partners in a business relationship.

n Different sales document types represent different outline agreements in the SAP System. The standard SAP System contains a range of different document types that you can either use directly or copy as references.

n The two main outline agreements are scheduling agreements and contracts. n The simplest and most common type of scheduling agreement is represented in the system with

document type SA. Document types for scheduling agreements such as BL or DEL are special cases, that are used in the automotive component supplier industry.

n There are two types of contracts - value and quantity. Contracts can cover both goods and services. Generally, no restrictions apply to the different contract forms.

n Rental and maintenance contracts are frequently used in the service industry. Maintenance contracts are signed for products that the customer uses over a long period of time and which need to be serviced during that time. Alongside maintenance contracts, we also offer the Service Management application module whose functions are explained in another course.

Page 214: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 6

SAP AG 2003

Scheduling Agreements

Scheduling Agreement

1.4.1.6.

Delivery

Delivery

Delivery

n A scheduling agreement is an outline agreement between you and a sold-to party that is valid for a certain period of time. The scheduling agreement contains fixed delivery dates and quantities.

n These dates are contained in the schedule lines for the scheduling agreements. Once the scheduling agreement is due for delivery, you can create the delivery as normal or by using a delivery due list.

n When you enter schedule lines for an item in the scheduling agreement, the system adds up the quantities that have already been entered and compares them to both the target quantity and the quantity already shipped. This gives you an overview of all the open quantities.

n If the quantity in the schedule lines exceeds the target quantity, the system issues a warning message. n If the customer requires it, you can process invoices periodically, for example, once a month. All the

deliveries due for the billing document are combined in a collective invoice.

Page 215: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 7

SAP AG 2003

Quantity Contracts

Update released quantities

Contract

Delivery

Delivery

Delivery

Release Order

Release Order

Release Order

n A contract is an outline agreement between you and your customer that is valid for a certain time period. The contract does not contain any schedule lines, delivery quantities, or delivery dates. The same functions are available in contracts as in orders. You can also agree on special pr ice agreements or delivery times.

n The customer fulfills the contract with individual releases. Schedule lines are created in the release order when it is placed. The release order is then processed like a standard order. Any special agreements regarding pr ices or delivery deadlines are copied from the contract.

n Release orders are created with reference to a contract. This generates a document flow record that allows you to update released quantities and values in the contract.

n In copying control, you decide which types of sales documents can be used as release orders from a contract.

n You can create release orders in the following ways: � Choose Create with reference on the initial screen � In the Sales document menu, choose Sales document -> Create with reference -> To contract... � Assign an order item to a contract subsequently � Use the automatic system search for open outline agreements when you create an order

Page 216: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 8

SAP AG 2003

Messages Regarding Open Outline Agreements

M1 100 PCM2 30 L

Order

Material Value

M3 5 PC 5 000 USD

- 10%

discount

Customer: Smith Inc. London

Open Outline Agreements x

There are open outline agreements for material M3

Continue.

List

Cancelx

Referenced DocumentsList Edit Goto System Help

Open Documents for Customer

Copyü

OrderType Doc Item. . .

KM 40000069 0010 . . .

KM 40001292 0030 . . .

. . .

n You can configure Customizing for the sales document type so that when you create a release order the system automatically searches for any open outline agreements. You can choose several options for the search and how the system should react if the search is successful: � Blank No checks � A/B Check at header / item level:

The system compares the customer and material numbers. If there are any open outline agreements, it displays a dialog box where you can choose whether to display a list of the agreements or continue processing the sales order. � C/D Check at header / item level and copy if unique:

If the system finds exactly one open outline agreement, the document is created automatically. Instead of displaying a dialog box, the system issues an informational message in the status ba r for the release. � E/F Check at header / item level and branch immediately to selection list:

Instead of displaying a dialog box, the system immediately goes to the selection list. No dialog box is displayed. If there is only one open contract, ,the system reacts as in C/D.

Page 217: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 9

SAP AG 2002

Value Contracts

Contract

Item Target Value

10 10 000 Euro

- 10% discount

Customer: Smith AGHeadquarters

Validity: 01/2003 -12/2004

n The value contract is an outline agreement between you and your customer. It defines that your customer agrees to purchase a fixed total value (target amount) of goods and services during the defined period.

n The value contract can contain other agreements between you and your customer that are checked in the release orders: � Special price agreements � Customer restrictions � Material restrictions

n If you create an order for which a valid contract exists, the system will inform you of this if you have activated the relevant check in Customizing for the sales document type.

n You can change the target values in the contract later.

Page 218: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 10

SAP AG 2003

Valid Materials

ProductHierarchy

Level

1 00001 Tools00001 Tools

0000100001 Electric 0000100002 Pneum.2

3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

D1 Installation

M1 Material 1

M5 Material 5

D3 Maintenance... ...

AssortmentModule

n In the standard system you can restrict the materials that can be released in a value contract in the following ways: � Product hierarchy (can be searched for generically by entering the first few digits such as

0000101*) � List of valid materials (assortment module)

n If both the product hierarchy and the assortment module are maintained in the document, all of the materials that belong to one or other of the material groups are valid for the release order (logical OR link).

n Assortment modules for value contracts are maintained in the master data for products. You can define a validity period for each material in the assortment module. When you create a release order, the system checks the respective entry date against the validity period.

n If you have not made any entries in the document, all the materials defined in sales can be released unless there are any other restrictions in copying control at item level. These materials are also limited in that they must be permitted for the sales area assigned to the value contract (copying control).

Page 219: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 11

SAP AG 2002

Value Contracts - Release Orders

Release Order

Material Value

M1 4PC 6 000 Euro6 000 Euro

-- 10% discount10% discount

Customer: Smith Inc.Munich

Release Order

Material Value

M2 3Pc 6 000 Euro

- 10% discount

Customer: Smith Inc.Hamburg

Release Order

Material Value

M3 5 PC 5 000 Euro

- 10% discount

Customer: Smith Inc. New York

Contractalreadyfulfilled

Contract

Item Target Value

10 10 000 Euro

- 10% discount

Customer: Smith Inc.Headquarters

Validity: 01/03- 12/04

n A release order releases a partial quantity of the agreed total value of the goods or services from a contract. The release order is a type of sales order.

n Normally, you create a release order with reference to a contract. Several functions exist for searching for the relevant contract: � Search for suitable contracts using the partner number � Search for suitable partners using the contract number (for customer lists only)

n With the item selection function, you can select items from all the valid materials. You can choose

materials directly or by exploding an assortment module. n Delivery quantities and times are stored in the schedule lines for the release order. n You can create release orders in any currency and the total value is updated in the currency of the

contract. n When you create a release order, the system checks the requirements stored in the contract such as

the release rule or validity period. The value of the release order is compared with the value still open in the contract. You can define how the system responds when this value is exceeded.

n You can assign an order to a contract later both at header and item level. The system automatically re-determines pricing. Values in the contract can only be updated when this assignment is defined at item level.

Page 220: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 12

SAP AG 2002

Billing Value Contracts

Contract

Item Target Value

10 10 000 Euro

- 10% discount

Customer: Smith Inc.Headquarters

Validity: 01/03- 12/04

Release Order

Material Net Value

M3 5 PC 5 000 Euro

- 10% discount

Customer: Smith Inc. New York

Bill Doc

Material Net Value

M1 2 PC .... Euro

M2 5 PC .... Euro

Customer: Smith Inc.

Billrelease?

Billing plan?

n You can either bill the value contract directly or you can bill each release order. � Billing a release order

You can use standard order OR for release orders. Billing can be either order- or delivery-related.

� Billing a value contract Order type WA exists in the standard system for the release. The value contract is then billed according to the order. A billing plan allows you to bill the contract for several dates and partial quantities at once. The system automatically adjusts the open billing dates if you make a subsequent change to the target value in an item in the value contract.

n The system does not support automatic billing of value contracts that have not been completely released.

Page 221: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 13

SAP AG 2002

Controlling Value Contracts

Sales Doc. Type Item Category

l WK1 WKN

lWK2Material-related

WKCItem Category Group: VCIT

Usage Flag: -

Item Category Group: -

Usage Flag: VCTRWith or withoutAssortment Module

withValue Contract

Material

n There are two types of value contracts in the SAP standard system: � WK1 General value contract: This order type allows you to refer to different materials and

services according to the selection options described earlier. � WK2 Material-related value contract: This is used when the contract contains exactly one material

(for example, configurable). n In Customizing, you only distinguish between the sales document types for value contracts WK1 and

WK2 in the screen sequence group for document header and item. n You can maintain the value contract material in the item category. It acts as a technical vehicle in the

contract item for determining important data, such as account assignments, taxes or statistical updates.

n Document type WK1 uses item category WKN. Document type WK2 uses item category WKC. According to what you enter in the item, the system determines the item category with the usage indicator VCTR or the item category group VCIT. In copying control, you can decide at item level if the value contract material should be copied to the release, (WKC) or not (WKN).

n If a release exceeds the target value in a contract item, you can configure how the system reacts: no response, two different warning messages and an error message.

n In the standard system, value contracts (document determination procedure Y) use pricing procedure WK0001 with condition type WK00 for the agreed target value.

Page 222: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 14

SAP AG 2003

Partners Authorized to Release in Contract

Contract

Material Value

M1 4St 6 000 Euro

- 10% discount

Sold-To Party:Smith Inc.,

New YorkPartner authorized to release: Smith & Little, SF

Partner Function SP

Partner Function AA

Customer Hierarchy

n Normally, both the sold-to party and other business partners are authorized to release from a contract. This means that the central office for a company can decide which of its branches can release from a contract. There may also be several ship-to parties.

n To meet this requirement, maintain the Check partner authorization field in Customizing for the sales document type. In the sales order, you can then display the partners authorized to release in a customer list (rule A) or in the customer hierarchy (rule B).

n The partner determination procedure assigns the partners authorized to release against the contract. n If there are several partners authorized to release against a contract, you can choose the relevant

partner from a list when you create the release order. n If there are several ship-to parties that are authorized to release for the selected sold-to party, you can

choose the relevant one from a list when you create the release. n So that the releasing partner can be different than the sold-to party for the contract, copying control

uses requirement 002 (different customer to that in header) at header level.

Page 223: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 15

SAP AG 2002

Partners Authorized to Release: Customer List

Contract40002000

Header/Partner

SPBPPYSH

AAAAAA

AWAWAW

4711472247334744

481048114812

491049114912

OrderHeader/Partner

SPBPPYSH

4812472247334911

Select SH

4711 Meyer4810 Glory4811 Baker4812 Cohen

New YorkDallasPhoenixSan Diegox

Select: SP x

Releasing Partner

Contract 40002000

Requested deliv. date D 19.06.200x

Create Order: Initial Screen x

Select SH

4744 Meyer4910 Webber4911 Singer4912 Hart

Las VegasPhoenixPhoenixPhoenix

x

Select: SH x

Rule A Check Contract Partners If there is a customer list, you can store the partners authorized to release directly in the partner

screen for the contract document. In the standard system, partner function AA has been defined for use as an optional sold-to party partner function in the relevant partner determination procedure (KAB procedure in the standard system).

n Alternative ship-to parties are represented by partner function AW. n If there are already several possible sold-to parties in the customer master record (partner functions

SP and AA), when you create the contract, the system displays a selection screen where you can choose and copy several partners in one step.

n Partners authorized to release are only checked at header level.

Page 224: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 16

SAP AG 2003

Contract Data in Sales Documents

Dismantling Date:

OrderScreen: Contract Data

Contract Start: 07.01.

Installation Date:

Acceptance Date:

Contract Conclusion:

Contract End: 31.12.

Requested Cancellation Date:

Cancelling Party:

Cancellation Received:

Sales Doc. Type: RC

Contract Data Allowed: X

Sales Doc. Type: RCRental Contract

Customer: C1

Order

Header

Item 10

Item 20

IMG

n In Customizing for sales document types, you can activate the contract data. � Blank No contract data � X Contract data is permitted. Any changes to the contract header are not copied to the items. � Y Contract data is permitted. Changes to the contract header are automatically copied to the

items if the header and item data were previously identical. Changes are saved in a log. The log also notes any possible problems and inconsistencies.

n You can maintain contract data at both the header and the item level in the sales document. Contract data at header level is valid for all items as long as the data at item level is not different.

n You can use the date determination rules so that the system automatically finds deadlines relevant to the contract.

Page 225: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 17

SAP AG 2003

Determining Dates

Proposal

RC - Create Contract

Contract Start: 08.07.2000

Contract End: 07.07.2001

Rule 05

Rule 08

Manual Entry

Installation Date: 08.07.2000

Contract Profile 0001

Contract start rule: 05

Contract end rule: 08

Duration: 1 year

Sales Doc. Type: RC

Contract Profile: 0001

Date Determination Rules:

01 - Today's date02 - Start of contract05 - Installation date08 - End of period12 - Start of contract + 1 week. . .

Cancellation proc.: 0001

IMG

IMG

n When you create a contract the system proposes, for example, the start and end dates of the contract. n You define the date determination rules in Customizing. These rules start the document on one of the

dates that you have set (for example, today's date or installation date). Any interval you specify can also be added to this date. You can also schedule the date for the beginning or end of the month that is determined in this manner.

n If you specify a duration category, the system automatically generates the duration of the contract. This can be a component of the date rule, for example, for determining the end of the contract.

n If you assign a contract profile to the sales document type, the system automatically determines default values specific to the contract. These could be: � Rules for determining start and end of the contract � Duration category � Subsequent activities � Cancellation procedure

Page 226: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 18

SAP AG 2003

Outline Agreements: Summary

You are now able to:

l Use different types of outline agreements and their functions

l Configure outline agreements in Customizing so that they meet your requirements

Page 227: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 19

Outline Agreements - Exercises

Unit: Outline Agreements

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Use outline agreements and configure their specific settings in Customizing

• Explain the concept of partners authorized to release

Outline agreements such as quantity, value or rental contracts play an important role in almost every branch of industry. Long-term agreements enable you to use forward planning and special pricing arrangements.

1-1 You have entered into a value contract with customer T-S62A## that is valid for 6 months. Create a contract and indicate the party authorized to release. The materials that are permitted for contract releases will be listed in an assortment module. The customer subsequently calls releases as orders. The system determines the permitted partners and materials for releases from the information stored in the value contract.

1-1-1 Create an assortment module for value contracts. The system assigns a number to the assortment module. You should then enter the description value contract module ## an. The module should be valid until the end of next year. List the materials T-ATB##, T-ATC## and T-ATD##.

Module number: _______________________________________

1-1-2 When the system automatically determines item categories, the item category for value contracts is determined by the usage indicator VCTR when an assortment module is specified.

Check in Customizing which item category has been found for sales document type WK1 Value contract – general.

Item category: _______________________________________

1-1-3 Display the item category.

Value contract material: _______________________________________

Page 228: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 20

1-1-4 Create a value contract for customer T-S62A## with purchase order number ##LO605-WK101 and the description Value contract ##:

Order type: WK1 Sold-to party: Customer T-S62A## Authorized SH: Customer T-S62E## Authorized SH: Customer T-S62F##

Valid from: Today until 6 months from today Target value: 20,000 Euro Assortment module: see above

1-1-5 Create a release order for the value contract above with purchase order number ##LO605-OR11.

Order type: OR Releasing partner: Customer T-S62A## Ship-to party: Customer T-S62F##

Material: Material T-ATB## (1 unit) Material T-ATC## (1 unit)

1-1-6 Create a second release order with purchase order number ##LO605-OR12.

Order type: OR Releasing partner: Customer T-S62E## Ship-to party: Customer T-S62F##

Material: Material T-ATB## (10 units)

What message appears when you save? ______________________________________________________ Reduce the quantity to one unit and save.

1-1-7 Determine the total released value for the value contract. ____________________________________________________________

1-1-8 Check in the document flow to determine how many release orders exist for the contract. Total: _______________________________________

1-1-9 Optional

Where do you determine whether the value contract material should be transferred to the release order or not? ____________________________________________________________

Page 229: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 21

____________________________________________________________

1-1-10 Optional

Which item category settings do you use to control what happens when the target value in the contract is exceeded? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

1-1-11 Optional

Which partner determination procedure has been assigned to the value contract? ____________________________________________________________

1-1-12 Optional

Which partner functions for releasing partners are configured in this procedure? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

1-2 You have entered into a rental contract with customer T-S62D##.

1-2-1 Enter an outline agreement for customer T-S62D## with purchase order number ##LO605-OP01. Do not enter a sales area.

Which sales area was determined? __________________________________

1-2-2 When you create the rental contract, the system refers to the contract profile for essential contract data. Find the following contact data in the document:

Contract start date rule _________________________________ Contract end date rule _________________________________ Validity period category _________________________________ Contract validity period _________________________________ Cancellation procedure _________________________________

Note: The contract data appears on a separate tab page in the document header.

Page 230: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 22

Outline Agreements - Solutions

Unit: Outline Agreements

1-1 Value contracts and releases

1-1-1 Create an assortment module

Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master data → Products → Value contract assortment module → Create → Button: Items → Enter Items → Save

Module number: _______________________________________

1-1-2 Check in Customizing which item category has been found for sales document type WK1 Value contract – general.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Contracts → Value Contract → Assign item category to…

Item category: WKN

1-1-3 Display the item category.

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Contracts → Value Contract → Define item categories for value contract…→ Position on WKN

Value contract material: WKM1

1-1-4 Create a value contract

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create:

Order type: WK1 Sold-to party: T-S62A##

→ Goto → Header → Partnersr

WE Contract release T-S62E## SH Contract rel. order: T-S62F## → return

Page 231: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 23

Valid from: Today until 6 months from today Target value: 20,000 UNI Assortment module: see above

1-1-5 Create a release contract for the value contract

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create Order type: OR

Button: Create with reference → Contract tab Button: Selection List Select the releasing sold-to party and ship-to party in the dialog: Releasing sold-to party: T-S62A## Ship-to party: T-S62F##

→ in screen: Selection list for reference document → Button: Expand assortment module → Enter materials and quantities Material: T-ATB## (1 unit) Material: T-ATC## (1 unit) → Back Button: Copy → Save

1-1-6 Create a second release order

Menu paths: see above

Order type: OR Releasing partner: T-S62E## Ship-to party: T-S62F##

Material: T-ATA## (10 units)

What message appears when you save?

The target value of the contract has been exceeded.

Button: Edit

Reduce the quantity to one unit and save.

1-1-7 Determine the total released value for the value contract.

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Contract → Display

Field: Released value: 6,097.00 EURO

1-1-8 Check in the document flow to see how many release orders exist for the contract.

→ Environment → Display document flow :

Total: 2

1-1-9 Optional

Page 232: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 24

Where do you determine whether the value contract material should be transferred to the release order or not?

→ In copying control at item level, at item level

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Contracts → Value contract → Copying control for value contract Button: Position Target: OR Source: WK1 Dialog structure: Item Field: Contract item copy mode

1-1-10 Optional

Which item category settings do you use to control what happens when the target value in the contract is exceeded?

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Contracts → Value Contract → Define item categories for value contract…→ Position on WKN

Information area: Business data Field: Completion rule Information area: Value contract Field: Contract release control

1-1-11 Optional

Which partner determination procedure has been assigned to the value contract?

IMG→ Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions→ Partner Determination → Set Up Partner Determination → Set Up Partner Determination for Customer Master → Partner Functions Folder (Double-click)

Sales Doc. Type: WK1 Partner determination procedure: KAB (Contract release)

1-1-12 Optional

Which partner functions for releasing partners are configured in this procedure?

→ Partner determination procedures folder (Double-click) → Select procedure KAB → Partner functions in procedure (Double-click)

Partner function: AA (SP Contract rel. ord.) Partner function: AW (SH Contract rel. ord.)

1-2 You have entered into a rental contract with customer T-S62D##.

1-2-1 Create a rental contract

Page 233: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 25

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create Sales document type: RC Rental contract

Which sales area was determined?

1000 / 14 / 00

1-2-2 Find the following contract data in the rental contract:

Tab page: Header – Contract data

Contract start date rule Today’s date Contract end date Contract end + contract validity period Validity period category 1 year Contract validity period 1 year Cancellation procedure 0001 (Cancel.. at end of validity period)

Page 234: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination and Listing / Exclusion

l Material determination and

l Product selection

l Material listing and

l Material exclusion

Unit Contents:

Page 235: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination: Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

l Use the functions for material determination and product selection as well as material listing and material exclusion

l Explain how to configure Customizing so that these functions meet your needs

l Create master records

l Understand and analyze the settings for these functions in the sales document

Page 236: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

0,--ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special Business

Transactions

9. Incompletion

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

3. Sales Order Processing

10. Partnerdetermination

1. Introduction

Page 237: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination: Business Scenario

l Your company offers a wide range of products

l For various reasons, you want to regularly replace some products by others during the sales process

l In addition, you want to limit the product range available to certain customers

Page 238: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 5

SAP AG 1999

Determining Materials

Material enteredMaterial entered Substitute material

Substitute material

OrderItem

10

Material

4711

M14711 M1

Determining materials

n Material determination provides you with a tool for automatically exchanging materials in the sales document.

n The condition technique provides you with greater flexibility in material determination. When you process a document, the system automatically searches for valid master records that you created previously in material determination.

n You can assign a substitution reason to every master record in material determination that defines how the material should be determined. You define the substitution rules in Customizing. Examples in the standard system include: � Substitution reason 0002: Customized material � Substitution reason 0003: EAN number

n You do not need a material master record for the material number that you are replacing. n During order entry, the material ordered by the customer is replaced by the substitute defined in the

master record. The system now continues processing with the substitute (for example, in the availability check, pricing, delivery, billing).

n Note: The item overview for Sales A contains information about the material that was originally entered as well as the reason for substitution.

Page 239: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 6

SAP AG 1999

Selecting Products Manually

CustomerCustomergroupgroup

WholesalersWholesalers

CustomerCustomerSmithSmith

1. 47142. 47113. 4712

Customer: MillerProduct: 4712

1. 47112. 47163. 4712

Customer: SmithProduct: 4711

1. 47122. 4716

Customer group: GHProduct: 4711

4711 4712 4713

4714 4715 4716

CustomerCustomerMillerMiller

MaterialsMaterials

Master records fordetermining materials

n In some sectors of industry, the same products are sold in different packaging materials (for example, packaging for standard and promotion articles). Material master records exist in the system for managing these stocks. When you enter an order, you can use different material numbers for the same product.

n We have extended the functions in manual and automatic product selection so that material determination can support this business practice: � Reason for substitution 0005: Manual production selection (list of default values) � Reason for substitution 0004 / 0006: Automatic product selection (depending on availability

in order and delivery) n In manual production selection, (reason for substitution 0005), the system does not automatically

replace the product. Instead, it displays a list of all of the substitution materials and other information in the master record. You can then select the required material from this list.

n To simplify selection, the system displays the material quantities that can be confirmed on the customer's requested delivery date. If a material cannot be confirmed fully for the requested delivery date, the system displays the date on which the material can be completely delivered.

Page 240: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 7

SAP AG 1999

Master Data

Product 4713

Product 4711

Product 471102/01 - 05/01

1. Easter version

2. Standard product

Product 4714

Product 4715

Product 4711

09/09 - 12/31

Product 4711

1. Olympic version

2. Christmas packaging

3. Standard product

For material determination/product selection

n Maintain the master records for material determination in the master data menu for Sales and Distribution under Products.

n You can use the condition technique to define the master data for material determination at any level. For example, you can create data records using the material number or a combination of the material and customer numbers.

n When you process master records, you can: � Restrict the validity period of a record � Maintain separate entries for each key combination � Determine reasons for substitution � Save one or more substitutes per master record

n If there is more than one material defined in the master record for material determination / product selection, the sequence in which they appear defines the priority that they have.

Page 241: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 8

SAP AG 1999

Automatic Product Selection

April 1AutomaticAutomaticselectionselection

Product 4712 10 PC

Product:l available

4711 10 PC0 PC

June 1AutomaticAutomaticselectionselectionProduct:

l available4711 10 PC

4 PC

Product 4711 4 PC

Product 4714 6 PC

Order

Delivery

n In automatic product selection (reasons for substitution 0004 and 0006), the system replaces the entered material automatically if it is not available.

n If automatic product selection is being used, the system may display (based on customizing) the entered and substituted material as main and sub-items in the sales order.

n When you enter an order, the system tries to fill the quantity of the order with the first material in the material determination master record. If there is not enough of this material, it fills the remaining quantity with the next material.

n You can choose whether or not you want to re-run material determination when the delivery is created. If material determination is re-run, the result of the substitution may change due to the new availability situation.

n You can use the product attributes in the material and customer master records to exclude a particular material from product selection. This means, for example, that all the materials that have been rejected in the customer master will not be included by the system when it determines a substitution material.

n The Partial confirmation of product selection allows you to deal with shortfall cases (in which only the available quantity is confirmed, and it is less than the order quantity) by passing the shortfall quantity on to materials planning. In this case, an additional sub-item is generated with a specifically defined material.

Page 242: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 9

SAP AG 1999

Automatic Product Selection - Master Data

1. A2. B

Examples

Material entered: AIf material A isn't available, it is automatically replacedwith material B.

II

1. D2. C

Material entered: CThe customer orders material C. You want to clear out material D.Material D is selected automatically as long asit is available.

IIII

Master records fordetermining materials

Master records fordetermining materials

n The sequence of the substitution materials in the master data influences the result of the automatic product selection in the order.

n If you want the material that is first entered in the order to be included in the substitution, then you must enter it in the substitutions list. � Case A: The original material is in the first place in the list, and its available stock is included in

the substitution. The system then refers to the available stock for the next material in the master record. � Case B: First, the system uses up the available stock for the materials that appear in the master

record before the material that has been entered. Only when these stocks have been used up, does it include that material in the substitution.

Page 243: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 10

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination - Condition Technique (1)

Sales doc. type OR

Order

Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1

Material : M-10. . .

Procedure A00001

Page 244: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 11

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination - Condition Technique (2)

Sales doc. type OR Procedure A00001

Condition type A001

10 0 A001 Material entered20 0 . . .Order

Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1

Material : M-10. . .

Page 245: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 12

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination - Condition Technique (3)

Sales doc. type OR

. . .

Procedure A00001

Condition type A001

Access sequence A002

10 0 A001 Material entered20 0 . . .

Access seq. Valid from ToA002 01/01/1998 12/31/2002

Order

Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1

Material : M-10. . .

Page 246: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 13

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination - Condition Technique (4)

Sales doc. type OR

. . .

Procedure A00001

Condition type A001

Access sequence A002

Access:10 2 SlsOrg/DistCh/Ent.mat.

Access:20 1 Material entered

10 0 A001 Material entered20 0 . . .

Access seq. Valid from ToA002 01/01/1998 12/31/2002

Order

Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1

Material : M-10. . .

Page 247: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 14

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination - Condition Technique (5)

Sales doc. type OR

. . .

Procedure A00001

Condition type A001

Access sequence A002

Access:10 2 SlsOrg/DistCh/Ent.mat.

Access:20 1 Material entered

10 0 A001 Material entered20 0 . . .

Access seq. Valid from ToA002 01/01/1998 01/01/2002

Table 2ð No record available

Table 1 ð Successful access

Order

Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1

Material : M-10. . .

Page 248: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 15

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination - Condition Technique (6)

Sales doc. type OR

. . .

Procedure A00001

Condition type A001

Access sequence A002

Access:10 2 SlsOrg/DistCh/Ent.mat.

Access:20 1 Material entered

10 0 A001 Material entered20 0 . . .

Access seq. Valid from ToA002 01/01/1998 01/01/2002

Table 2 ð No record available

Table 1 ð Successful access

Entry: MAT-10

Material determination master record

Valid from . . . To . . .Subst.reason: 0002

Substitution material: M-10

Order

Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1

Material : M-10. . .

n The condition technique provides more flexibility in modeling material determination and product selection.

n You can assign a material determination procedure to each sales document type. The procedure contains all of the Customizing information that the system needs for material determination. The procedure includes one or more defined condition types

n One access sequence (search strategy) is assigned to each condition type. n Each access sequence consists of one or more accesses. n Each access contains exactly one condition table. This represents the search key that the system uses

to search for a valid master record. n You can activate an analysis of the material determination in the sales document. The system then

displays detailed information on how the materials were determined.

Page 249: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 16

SAP AG 2003

Material Listing and Exclusion

Sold-To Party: S1

Item Material

10 471120 471330 4714

Master Records forMaterial Listing

Master Records forMaterial Listing

Customer: S1Materials:

47114712

OrderOrder

n You want to make sure that your customer only receives SPECIFIC materials. You enter these materials as a material listing.

n The material listing is controlled by the condition technique. n In the above example, you have created master records with a key for the customer and material

numbers. This key is delivered in the standard system. The access sequence for the condition type guarantees that the system searches for valid master records both for the sold-to party and the payer.

n You can also define your own keys, for example : � Customer group/material � Customer/product hierarchy

n You define in the sales document type whether the system checks the material listing or not. n You want to ensure that the customer does NOT receive certain materials. You enter these materials

as a material exclusion. The material exclusion is also controlled with the condition technique.

Page 250: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 17

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination: Summary

You are now able to:

l Use the functions for material determination and product selection as well as material listing and material exclusion

l Explain how to configure Customizing so that these functions meet your needs

l Create master records

l Understand and analyze the settings for these functions in the sales document

Page 251: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 18

Material Substitution and Lists Exercises

Unit: Material Determination / Product Selection and Material Listing / Material Exclusion

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Explain how to use the material determination and listing / exclusion functions

Customers often need to be able to change materials automatically. For example, they need to be able to substitute a standard product with a promotion material for a certain time period.

In order to avoid delivering the wrong goods, you can create master records where you list the permitted or forbidden materials.

1-1 Starting now, material T-ATA## should automatically replace material T-ATB## for a period of two months.

1-1-1 Create the relevant master record for material determination. Choose determination type A001.

1-1-2 Create a trade fair order (ZA##) order with purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##09 for sold-to party T-S62A## and material T-ATB## (1 unit). Verify that the material is replaced automatically.

1-1-3 In which sales document view can you find information about the material entered (and if necessary the reason for substitution)?

View: _________________________________

1-2 You would like your employees in sales order processing to be able to call up a selection list for certain products, from which they can then choose a suitable material.

1-2-1 Create a reason for substitution Z## with the description Substitution ## in Customizing. Choose a substitution strategy that allows the selection list.

1-2-2 Enter a material determination master record with the description MONITOR## and reason for substitution Z##. The master record should

Page 252: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 19

contain the materials T-ATA##, T-ATB## and T-ATC##. The data record is valid for two months.

1-2-3 Enter a trade fair (ZA##) order with purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##10 for sold-to party T-S62A##. Enter MONITOR## as the material with a quantity of 1 and check the effect on your master record.

1-3 A discussion between your sales department and customer T-S62B## reveals that the customer no longer allowed to purchase materials T-ATF## and T-ATG##.

1-3-1 Enter a condition record for the material exclusion.

1-3-2 Check the effect of this material master record by creating a trade fair order (ZA##) for customer T-S62B## with purchase order number ##605-ZA##11. Try to create an item with materials T-ATA## and T-ATF##.

Which item cannot be created and why?

____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

1-4 Optional

A discussion between the sales department and customer T-S62A## reveals that the customer can only use materials T-ATA##, T-ATB## and T-ATC## in production and therefore does not need any other products.

1-4-1 Enter a condition record for the material listing.

1-4-2 Check the effect of this material master record by creating a trade fair order (ZA##) for customer T-S62A## with purchase order number ##605-ZA##12. Try to create an item with materials T-ATA## and T-ATF##.

Which item cannot be created and why? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

Page 253: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 20

Material Substitution and Lists Solutions

Unit: Material Determination / Product Selection and Material Listing / Material Exclusion

1-1 Starting now, material T-ATA## should automatically replace material T-ATB## for a period of two months.

1-1-1 Material master for material determination

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Master data à Products à Material Determination à Create Material determination type: A001

Entered Material: T-ATB## Material: T-ATA## à Save à Exit

Note: The validity period of the master record was proposed from the Customizing of condition type A001.

1-1-2 Order

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create

1-1-3 In which sales document view can you find information about the material entered (and if necessary the reason for substitution)?

View: Item details: Sales A, Field: Entered material

1-2 Manual product selection from a selection list

1-2-1 Substitution reason:

IMG àSales and Distribution àBasic Functions à Material Determination à Define substitution reasons

Button: New entries Reason for substitution: Z## Description: Substitution ## Strategy: A à Save à Exit

1-2-2 Material master for material determination

Page 254: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 21

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Master data à Products à Material determination à Create

Material determin. type: A001

Entered mat.: MONITOR## Material: T-ATA## Reason: Z##

à Select entry à Goto à Alternative materials à Enter additional materials à Save à?Exit

1-2-3 Order

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create

1-3 Material exclusion

1-3-1 Master record for material exclusion

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Master data à Products à Lists/Exclusion à Create

List /Excl. type: B001

Customer: T-S62B## ?à Maintain materials à Save à Exit

1-3-2 Order

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create

Which item cannot be created and why?

Material T-ATF## cannot be entered in the document. Message: Material T-ATF## has been excluded.

1-4 Optional

Material listing

1-4-1 Master record for material listing

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Master data à Products à Lists/Exclusion à Create

List /Excl. type: A001 à Key combination: Customer/ material

Customer: T-S62A## ?à Maintain materials à Save à Exit

Page 255: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 22

1-4-2 Order

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create

Which item cannot be created and why?

Material T-ATF## cannot be entered in the document. Message: Material T-ATF## is not listed and therefore not allowed.

Page 256: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods

l Exclusive and inclusive bonus quantities

l Master data

l Free goods condition technique

l Free goods in statistics and Controlling

Unit Contents:

Page 257: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods: Objectives

At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to:

l Use the free goods functions in your sales process

l Enter master records for exclusive and inclusive bonus quantities

l Explain how to configure the Customizing settings for free goods

Page 258: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods: Course Overview Diagram

XYZ/99M1 -?-

§

ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special Business

Transactions

9. Incompletion

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

3. Sales Order Processing

10. Partnerdetermination

1. Introduction

0,--

Page 259: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods: Business Scenario

l Free goods play a large role in the price negotiations with your customers.

l As a result, you want to be able to determine free goods and place them in the sales documents automatically.

l Your responsibility is to automate the determination of free goods, taking into account that certain information related to the free goods has to be supplied to Controlling.

Page 260: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 5

SAP AG 1999

Inclusive BQ

One free cart

on

of these

Exclusive and Inclusive Bonus Quantities (1)

Page 261: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 6

SAP AG 1999

Exclusive and Inclusive Bonus Quantities (2)

+Exclusive BQInclusive BQ

One free cart

on

of these

n In industry sectors such as retail, the chemicals industry or consumer goods industry, it is common to provide discounts in the form of free goods.

n Free goods can be part of the order quantity not included in the invoice. This is called an inclusive bonus quantity. The ordered goods and the free goods both involve the same material. The quantity units of the free goods and ordered goods must be the same.

n Free goods can also take the form of extra goods that are free of charge. These are called exclusive bonus quantities.

n In exclusive bonus quantities, the extra goods are delivered free of charge and are not typically included in the invoice. This can either be an additional quantity of the goods ordered or it can be another article.

n The exclusive free goods appear in the SD document as an individual, free-of-charge item.

Page 262: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 7

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods in the Sales Order

Order

Sold-to party: C2

Pricing date: May 8

Delivery date: May 15

Item HI Material Quant. ICat

10 Eggs 4 TAN

20 10 Eggs 1 TANN

Item HI Material Quant. ICat

10 Eggs 5 TAN

20 10 Duck 1 TANN

Exclusive BQOrder

Inclusive BQ

Sold-to party: C1

Pricing date: May 8

Delivery date: May 15

n Both types of free goods are treated in the same way in the sales order. The material that has been ordered is entered as a main item, the free goods material is automatically displayed as a sub-item.

n The item category determines how the the item is controlled later in the business process (for example, for delivery or pricing). Item categories TAN and TANN are used in the standard SAP system. The system determines them automatically by accessing the relevant condition records. The system then accesses the free goods master record with the pricing date.

n As in earlier releases, you can also enter free goods by manually entering data in the higher-level item and item category fields (TANN). However in this case, the system does not refer to the free goods master record, and settings such as automatically reducing the quantity of the main item or for the delivery are missing.

n The system re-reads the free goods master record in the sales order if the quantities in the main item change or if the pricing date changes. The system then deletes the sub-items and re-creates them. Any manual changes to the free goods quantity are lost.

n If pricing is re-run in the sales order, it does not affect the free goods determination.

Page 263: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 8

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods - Master Data

30

SlsOrg DistChan Cust. Material

1000 10 C1 M1

Valid from: July 1 To: October 30

Material Min. At/From Adit. in % ReR LAdd. quantity D

M1 Eggs 20 9 CAR 1 PC 10 1 EM2 Duck 2 Addition

n The condition technique is used for free goods. Free goods are generally regarded as a supplement to the pricing agreement for a material.

n You maintain the free goods in the master records for sale s by: � Using a different menu entry � Going to Prices and Discounts/surcharges when maintaining the master records

n You can define master records for free goods at any level, for example, material, customer / material, price list category / currency / material or customer hierarchy / material.

n You can restrict master records for one level in many different ways: � Validity period: The condition is only valid within this period � Lowest quantity: The condition comes into affect when this quantity has been exceeded � Delivery control: See next page � Calculation type: See following page � Scales

n You can process different master data with the same key for inclusive and exclusive bonus quantities are the same time. You only need to press a button to switch between the two types of discount.

n When you enter an exclusive bonus quantity, an extra entry line appears where you can enter the good if it is not the same as the ordered material.

Page 264: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 9

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods - Calculation Rule

l Rule 1: Prorated

l Rule 2: Related to units

l Rule 3: Whole units

l Rule ##: Your own rule

n When you specify a calculation rule, you decide how the system determines the free goods quantity from the additional and document quantities. � The free goods quantity is the quantity that is calculated from the discount quantity (not the

minimum quantity). � The additional quantity is the quantity delivered free-of-charge. � The document quantity is the quantity entered by the person creating the sales order.

n Three calculation rules are provided in the standard system. The following example describes how they work:

You offer supply 20 units of free goods for a free goods quantity of 100 units. The customer orders 162 units (document quantity). � Rule 1 prorated: 32 units free goods [ 162*(20/100) = rounded down ] � Rule 2 unit-related: 20 units free goods [ 100*(20/100) = rounded down ] � Rule 3 whole units: 0 units free goods [ 162 is not a complete unit of 100]

n Calculation rules are stored in the system in the form of ABAP/4 code. You can also define your own rules (transaction VOFM, under menu entry, formulas).

Page 265: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 10

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods - Statistics and Controlling

QuantityPriceDiscountVPRSRevenue Sales ded. CostsCO

SD

Examples for Transferring Information to CO-PA

10 1100

40 5100

40 5

MI SI

SAPStandard

1

10 1100 20

- 2040 5

100 20- 20

40 5

MI SI

TANN• Pricing:B• FG100 w/

req. 55

2

10 1100

45 ß100

45

MI SI

LF ⇒ F1TANN• No pricing

3

n You can see detailed information about free goods in the Profitability Analysis and Statistics. n The revenues, sales deductions and costs of free goods can be transferred to Profitability Analysis

(CO-PA) in different ways, shown in the examples below. (MIt = main item, SIt = sub-item) � Scenario 1 (SAP standard system)

MIt : Not influenced by free goods SIt: Pricing de-activated, calculation price (VPRS) configured as costs. � Scenario 2

MIt : Not influenced by free goods SIt: Pricing for item category TANN active with setting B (in the costing procedure, condition type FG100 calculates a 100% discount through requirement 55 at level 819), discount reduces revenues, the transfer price is set as the costs. � Scenario 3

MIt : Cumulation of calculation price for lower-level item configured at main item level (in copying control Delivery -> Billing document), accumulated clearing price set as costs,SIt: Pricing deactivated

Page 266: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 11

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods - Condition Technique

Table 05 ⇒ No record availableTable 10 ⇒ Successful access

Sales area 1000 10 00Doc. procedure ACust. procedure 1

10 1 NA00 Free goods. . .

Access seq. Valid from To

Access:10 05 Material

Access:20 10 SlsOrg/DistCh/Cust./Mat.

1000 10 C1 M1 ... ... ... ... ... ...

Order

1

2

Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1

Main item TAN

Sub-item TANN

Condition records

Access sequence NA00

Condition type NA00

Procedure NA0001

n The condition technique provides greater flexibility for using the free goods functions. n The system uses the information about the sales areas, document determination procedure (from the

sales document type) and customer determination procedure (from the customer master) to determine the free goods determination procedure.

n The procedure contains a list of the condition types for the free goods. n One access sequence (search strategy) is assigned to each condition type. Each access sequence

consists of one or more accesses. n Each access contains exactly one condition table. This represents the search key that the system uses

to search for a valid master record. n If the search is successful, the system generates a sub-item for the free goods in the document. The

item category is assigned with the item category usage FREE. n Pricing for both items is controlled with the item category as normal. n You can activate an analysis of the free goods determination in the sales document. The system then

displays detailed information on how the free goods were determined.

Page 267: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 12

SAP AG 1999

Free Goods: Unit Summary

You are now able to:

l Use the free goods functions in your sales process

l Enter master records for exclusive and inclusive bonus quantities

l Explain how to configure the Customizing settings for free goods

Page 268: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 13

Free Goods - Exercises

Unit: Free Goods

At the end of these exercises, you will be able to:

• Create different master records for free goods

• Explain how free goods affect the sales process

• Describe how to control the free goods

2.

You can extend pricing by using free goods in the form of exclusive and inclusive bonus quantities.

You make the relevant agreements with your customer.

These will be automatically controlled by the R/3 System in the document when you enter a sales order.

1-1 You have agreed on a price reduction for customer T-S62A## in the form of free goods.

1-1-1 Create a free goods master record (free goods type NA00) for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10. If the customer orders at least 20 units of material T-ATC##, 10% of the purchased quantity should be free of charge. The free-of charge material should be a proportion of the quantity in the higher- level item.

1-1-2 Create a trade fair order (ZA##) with purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##13 for customer T-S62A## and Material T-ATC##. The purchase order quantity is 10 units.

What message appears? ____________________________________________________________

1-1-3 Increase the quantity to 40 units. What are the quantities in the higher- level and sub- items?

Main item: _______________________________________ Subitem: _______________________________________

Page 269: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 14

1-2 You make another free goods agreement with customer T-S62E## for material T-ATD##. The minimum order quantity is 20 units. You want to deliver one free-of-charge unit of material T-ATA## for each 20 units ordered.

1-2-1 Create the relevant master record for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10.

1-2-2 In the record, indicate that the system only determines the quantity of the free-of-charge material in multiples of the free goods quantity.

1-2-3 Create a trade fair order (ZA##) with purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##14 for customer T-S62E## and Material T-ATD##. The purchase order quantity is 40 units.

1-3 Optional The system automatically created a free goods sub- item for the order with purchase order number ##LO605-ZA##14. The system runs pricing for this sub- item even though it is free of charge.

1-3-1 Which item category did the system find for the sub- item and which key did it use? Item category: _______________________________________ Key: _______________________________________

1-3-2 Which settings in Customizing affect pricing for the free-of-charge item? ____________________________________________________________

Page 270: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 15

Free Goods - Solutions

Unit: Free Goods

1-1 You have agreed on a price reduction for customer T-S62A## in the form of free goods.

1-1-1 Master record for free goods

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Master data à Conditions à Free goods à Create

Type of free goods NA00

Customer: T-S62A##

Material: T-ATC## Minimum quantity: 20 From: 10 Unit of measure: ST are free goods: 1 Unit of measure: PC Calculation type (CalT): 1 Delivery control (L): blank à Save à Exit

Note: The validity period of the master record was proposed from the Customizing of condition type A001.

1-1-2 Order

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create

What message appears?

Minimum quantity of 20 PC of free goods has not been reached.

1-1-3 Increase the quantity to 40 units. What are the quantities in the higher-level and sub-items?

Main item: 36 units Sub-item: 4 units

1-2 You make another free goods agreement with customer T-S62E## for material T-ATD##.

Page 271: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 16

1-2-1 Master record

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Master data à Conditions à Free goods à Create

Type of free goods NA00

Button: Exclusive BQ

Customer: T-S62E##

Material: T-ATD## Minimum quantity: 20 Free goods qty: 20 Unit of measure: ST Additional free goods: 1 Unit of measure: PC Additional material: T-ATA##

1-2-2 Calculation type

Calculation type (CalT): 2

1-2-3 Order

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create

1-3 Optional Pricing for free goods

1-3-1 Which item category did the system find for the sub-item and which key did it use?

Logistics à Sales and distribution à Sales à Order (order type ZA##) à Create

Item category: TANN

IMG à Sales and Distribution à Basic Functions à Free Goods à Determine item category for the free goods item

Key: ZA## / NORM / FREE /TAN

1-3-2 Which settings in Customizing affect pricing for the free-of-charge item?

IMG à Sales and Distribution à Basic Functions à Free Goods à Control Free Goods Pricing à? Control pricing for free goods item category…

à Item category: Pricing: B Pricing Free goods (100% discount)

Page 272: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG 1999

Introduction: Summary

§§

0,--ORORLFLFF2F2

7. Data flow8. Special Business

Transactions

9. Incompletion

12. Materialdetermination

2. Organizationalunits

4. Sales document type

11. Outlineagreements

13. Freegoods

6. Schedule line cat.

5. Item category

1. Introduction

3. Sales Order Processing

10. Partnerdetermination

XYZ/99XYZ/99M1M1 -?--?-

Page 273: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG 1999

Course Objectives

You are now able to:

l Describe how sales fits into the SD process chain

l Configure Customizing so that it represents your specific sales requirements

l Adjust and use Help within the system

Page 274: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG 1999

Recommended Follow-Up Activities

l Go through the exercises using IDES data or your own data

l Read on-line documentation

l Read IMG documentation

l Read release notes

Page 275: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG 1999

LO606 Sales Support

SAP AG

LO606LO606

Sales WorkshopSales Workshop

Page 276: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG

R

Contents

Scenario 3 Material Determination

Scenario 4 Bills of Materials

Scenario 1 Sales to Employees

Scenario 2 Service Orders

Preface

Exercises

Solutions

Appendix

Page 277: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

Data Used in the Exercises

To get the maximum benefit from the exercises, we recommend that you only use the data below:

Master data

Training system

Comments IDES Data

Scenario

Customer Search term

MA## MA## One-time customer 100016 Sales to employees

T-L63A## ##LO606-01 Normal customer 2006 Service order / Material determination

T-L63B## ##LO606-02 Special customer 2007 Material determination

T-L63C## ##LO606-03 Additional ship-to party: T-L63B##

2006 Material determination

T-L63D## ##LO606-04 2006 Bill of material

Material Old material no.

(Trading goods (HAWA)/ Branch: M)

T-ATM## ##LO606-01

M-11 Sales to employees

T-ATN## ##LO606-02 M-12 Sales to employees

T-ATO## ##LO606-03 M-10 Service order

T-ATP## ##LO606-04 Service material I-1000 Service order

T-ATQ## ##LO606-05 Preceding model; Availability: 02

M-15

Material determination

T-ATR## ##LO606-06 Subsequent model M-15 Material determination

T-ATS## ##LO606-07 PC main item R-1001 Bill of material

T-ATT## ##LO606-08 Component: basic equipment

R-1170 Bill of material

T-ATU## ##LO606-09 Component: processor M-13 Bill of material

T-ATV## ##LO606-10 Component: main memory

M-14 Bill of material

T-ATW## ##LO606-11 Component: monitor M-15 Bill of material

Personnel

1701## Employee 1 1701 Service order

Page 278: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

Page 279: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG

R

Sales to Employees

Page 280: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG

R

Sales Sales to to EmployeesEmployees - Business Background

Company employees are often able to buy goods from their company at reduced prices.

In the following scenario, it is your job to create this process for your company - IDES. IDES has set up its own shop where employees can purchase the products at reduced rates.

Page 281: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG

R

Sales to EmployeesSales to Employees - Orders

The employee takes the goods from the shelves and pays in

cash.

The employee takes the goods

immediately.

Invoice

Cust.: MA##

1000 / 10 / 00

10 PC 1 pc

Inv. No.: 5718

The employee receives an invoice.

The delivery is created automatically.

n The goods offered to employees at a reduced price can be obtained from a special shop set up for employees.

n Employees select their goods, take them from the shelves and go to the checkout. Since employees can only buy the goods that are in the shop, an availability check and transfer of requirements are not necessary.

n You should not create any orders without a net value. This prevents documents without items or with free items from being created in the system.

n No individual customer master data for employees has been maintained in the system. Employee orders are processed using a collective master record (one-time customer account).

n Employees generally receive a discount of 15% off the material price. Some materials can have a higher discount.

n As soon as the employee has paid, they are given an invoice which serves as a receipt. n The employee takes the goods away immediately.

Page 282: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

SAP AG

R

Sales to Employees Sales to Employees - Delivery

.

Picking is not required. Goods issue is automatically posted.

Delivery

Cust: MA##

1000 10 00

10 PC 1 pc

Del. No.:80002451

The delivery is created automatically.

X

n The system automatically creates the delivery once the sales document has been saved. n Picking is not necessary, as the employees can only buy goods which are available in the shop. n Goods issue can be posted manually for a single delivery, or automatically in the background at the

end of each day.

Page 283: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 5

SAP AG

R

Sales to EmployeesSales to Employees - Billing Document

Invoice

Cust: MA##

1000 10 00

10 PC 1PC

Inv. no.: 9005718

An invoice has already been createdso it does not need to be re-printed.

Invoice9005718

Tocompany ?? X

n Because the goods are delivered as soon as the order has been saved, the order quantity is always the same as the goods issue quantity. This means that the billing document can be order-related.

n Billing documents are created automatically and collectively by running the billing list, for example, during night-time processing.

n In the financial accounting document, the billed amount is posted to a special cash sales account. There are no receivables for the customer.

Page 284: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 6

SAP AG

R

SalesSales to to EmployeesEmployees - Tasks

l Create a new sales document type for sales to employees

l Define a new item category for the order and delivery

l Configure the important fields in the incompletion log for processing sales to employees

l Create a customer master record for one-time customers

l Extend pricing to include employees

l Create an output master record for the invoice

l Test sales to employees in the system

Page 285: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 7

Scenario: Sales to Employees

• Create a new document type

• Generate a new item category

• Set up a new customer master record

• Set up pricing controls

• Set up output controls

• Set up the incompletion log

• Test the process

Your company produces computers that the employees can buy in the company shop at either cost price or at a reduced rate for employees. They have to pay in cash and take their purchases with them straight away. The employee then receives an invoice for a cash sale.

Goods issue is posted and billing documents are created automatically in collective processing, for example, at the end of the day.

1-1 Sales document type Create a sales document type for ZB## SE##-Sales.

1-1-1 To do this, copy the CS Cash Sales order type. Ensure that all related table entries are copied. Send the log of all the copied table entries to your office inbox. Save the new entry. Branch to your office inbox. Call up the log.

1-1-2 Set up the new document type so that during document processing, the Items Overview tab page follows the initial screen.

Page 286: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 8

1-1-3 A wide range of checks and functions can be activated in the sales document type, such as checking for open contracts or searching for customer-material info records. These checks take place in document processing and therefore affect system performance. Ensure that all the checks and functions you don't need have been de-activated.

1-1-4 Which entry prevents the user from saving incomplete documents? ________________________________________________________________

1-1-5 What affect does the entry in the Shipping conditions field have? ________________________________________________________________

1-1-6 Which entry causes a delivery to be created automatically when the sales document is saved? ________________________________________________________________

1-1-7 Which entry ensures that the current date is automatically used as the requested delivery date? ________________________________________________________________

1-1-8 What is the document type for the delivery? ________________________________________________________________

1-1-9 Check that the document is assigned to sales area 1000 10 00.

Page 287: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 9

1-2 Item category in the sales and delivery docume nts Create an item category for the sales to employees document type so that the item controls do not have to be the same as for cash sales.

1-2-1 Create a new item category BV## by copying the item category BVN. The description for the new item category should be BV##-Item. Use the settings from the original item category.

1-2-2 The log for this copying transaction documents all the table entries that have been copied. Use the log to check that the copy included item category BV## for the delivery (table TVLP: Delivery item categories).

1-2-3 Make sure that item category BV## is automatically determined for materials with item category group NORM in sales document type ZB##.

1-2-4 Change item category BV## for deliveries. Picking is not needed because the goods that are bought are already in the employee shop. Therefore, de-activate the Relevant for picking field for item category BV## of the delivery.

1-3 Incompletion Create a new incompletion procedure at header level.

1-3-1 Copy the incompletion procedure that controls the document type BV. Key: 60+## Description: SE##-Sales header

1-3-2 Change the new incompletion log: – Remove the entry for the purchase order number. – To stop the system from creating free-of-charge documents, add the Net value of the order field. – Copy the Sales office field.

1-3-3 Assign the procedure to sales document type ZB##. Make sure that incompletion documents cannot be saved.

Page 288: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 10

1-4 Customer master record The employees have to be saved in the system as customers so that you can create orders for them. During project planning, it was decided that an individual customer master record is not needed for each employee. Instead, a collective master record (one-time customer account) can be used for employee sales.

1-4-1 Create a customer master record accordingly: – Customer: SE## – Company code: 1000 IDES AG – Sales area: 1000 10 00 – Account group: CPDA Reference: – Customer: 100016 – Company code: 1000 IDES AG – Sales area: 1000 10 00 → Address screen: – Name: Sales employee ## – Search term: SE## → Sales screen: – Sales office: 1000 Frankfurt – Country: DE – Language key Language of the course → Billing screen: – Incoterms: CPT – Payment terms: 0001 – Tax classification: 1

1-5 Pricing Your sales manager has decided that each employee may receive a basic discount of 15%.

1-5-1 Maintain a master record for customer-dependent discount (K007 customer discount) of 15%.

1-5-2 Optional Better discounts are also available for certain materials. Check whether the access sequence K007 contains an access (customer/material) and, if necessary, supplement this with an exclusive access with sequential number 05 and condition table 005. Maintain a discount of 20 % for the new discount. Customer: SE##

Page 289: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 11

Material: T-ATN##

1-6 Printing the invoice The system should print the invoice automatically as soon as the sales document has been saved.

1-6-1 Create an output master data record. Use output type RD03. The output has been configured so that it is sent to the bill-to party. Set up the master record so that output is printed as soon as the document has been saved.

1-6-2 Maintain the following communication data for the output: Output device: LP01 Print immediately: activate Release after output: activate Number of messages: 1

Page 290: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 12

1-7 Sales to employees Test your settings by trying to create a sale to an employee.

1-7-1 Create a sale to an employee. Customer: SE## (Enter any address) In which overview tab page does the system start document processing? ____________________________________________________________ What are the Incoterms? ____________________________________________________________ What are the terms of payment? ____________________________________________________________ Can you save the document and why? ____________________________________________________________

1-7-2 Enter the following two items Material: T-ATM## (1 piece) Material: T-ATN## (1 piece) What discounts does the system find for material T-ATM##? Analyze pricing. ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Optional Which discount does the system find for material T-ATN##? Does it find the greater discount for material T-ATN##? Analyze pricing. ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

1-7-3 Which item categories did the system find for the items in the sales document? ____________________________________________________________

1-7-4 Save the order. Does the system automatically create a delivery? ____________________________________________________________

Page 291: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 13

1-7-5 Check whether the system automatically printed the output when you saved the sales document. ____________________________________________________________ Display the output on your screen.

1-7-6 What type of delivery has been created? ____________________________________________________________ Which item category does the system find for the delivery items? ____________________________________________________________ Post goods issue.

1-7-7 Create a billing document for the transaction. ____________________________________________________________ Which document does the billing document refer to? ____________________________________________________________ Where is this set in Customizing? ____________________________________________________________ What is the billing document type? ____________________________________________________________ Check the accounting document. To which accounts were the incoming payments posted? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

1-7-8 Did the system automatically determine an output in the billing document for printing the invoice? Why? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

Page 292: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 14

1-7-9 Look at the document flow for the whole process. Check the overal processing status of the individual documents.

Page 293: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 15

Scenario: Sales to Employees

• Create a new document type

• Define a new item category

• Set up a new customer master record

• Set up pricing controls

• Set up output controls

• Set up the incompletion log

• Test the process

Your company produces computers that the employees can buy in the company shop at either cost price or at a reduced rate for employees. They have to pay in cash and take their purchases with them. The employee then receives an invoice for a cash sale.

Goods issue is posted and billing documents are created automatically in collective processing, for example, at the end of the day.

1-1 Sales document type Create a sales document type for ZB## with description SE##-Sales.

1-1-1 To do this, copy the CS Cash Sales order type. Ensure that all related table entries are copied. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Header → Define sales document types → Select sales document type CS → Choose "Copy as" Key: ZB## Description: SE##-Sales Send the log of all the copied table entries to your office inbox. → System → List → Send → Recipient: LO606-##

Page 294: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 16

Save the new entry. Branch to your office inbox. Call up the log. → Office → Inbox → Office unviewed → Double-click on the log

1-1-2 Set up the new document type so that during document processing, the Items Overview tab page follows the initial screen. FCODE for overview screen field: UER2

1-1-3 A wide range of checks and functions can be activated in the sales document type, such as checking for open contracts or searching for customer-material info records. These checks take place in document processing and therefore affect system performance. Ensure that all the checks and functions you don't need have been de-activated. You can de-activate the following checks: – Credit limit – Check purchase order number – Commitment date – Open quotations, outline agreements and group master contracts messages – Product attribute messages – Payment cards

1-1-4 Which entry prevents the user from saving incomplete documents? The "Incomplet. messages" field is activated.

1-1-5 What affect does the entry in the Shipping conditions field have? See F1 Help for the field.

1-1-6 Which entry causes a delivery to be created automatically when the sales document is saved? "Immediate delivery" has been activated.

1-1-7 Which entries ensure that the current date is automatically used as the requested delivery date? – The "Lead time in days" field is empty. – The "Propose deliv. Date" field is activated.

1-1-8 What is the document type for the delivery? Delivery type BV

Page 295: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 17

1-1-9 Check that the document is assigned to sales area 1000 10 00. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Header → Assign sales area to sales document types → Assign sales order types permitted for sales areas

1-2 Item category in the sales and delivery documents Create an item category for the sales to employees document type so that the item controls do not have to be the same as for cash sales.

1-2-1 Create a new item category BV## by copying the item category BVN. The description for the new item category should be BV##-Item. Use the settings from the original item category. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories → Select item category BVN → Choose "Copy as" Key: BV## Description: BV##-item

1-2-2 The log for this copying transaction documents all the table entries that have been copied. Use the log to check that the copy included item category BV## for the delivery (table TVLP: Delivery item categories). Entry: In the "Allocation of delivery item categories table (TVLP )", copy: PSTY BV##

Page 296: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 18

1-2-3 Make sure that item category BV## is automatically determined for materials with item category group NORM in sales document type ZB##. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Assign item categories → Choose "Position" Sales doc. type: ZB## Item cat. group: NORM Item usage: blank Item cat.-Higher level item: blank Default Item Category (DfHC): BV## (Overwrite BVN) → Choose "Details" → Delete any alternative item categories

1-2-4 Change item category BV## for deliveries. Picking is not needed because the goods that are bought are already in the employee shop. Therefore, de-activate the Relevant for picking field for item category BV## of the delivery. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Shipping → Deliveries → Define item categories for deliveries → Select BV## → Choose "Details" → De-activate the "Relevant for picking" field

1-3 Incompletion Create a new incompletion procedure at header level. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Incompletion control for sales documents

1-3-1 Copy the incompletion procedure that controls the document type BV. → Assign incompletion procedures → Assign procedures to sales document types → Procedure 11→ Exit → Define incompletion procedures → Select incompletion group A → Choose "Procedures" → Choose "Change" → Select procedure 11 → Choose "Copy as" Key: 60+## Description: SE##-Sales header → Copy all entries

1-3-2 Change the new incompletion log:

Page 297: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 19

→ Select new procedure 60+## → Choose "Fields" – Remove the entry for the purchase order number. → Select the entry → Choose "Delete" – To stop the system from creating free-of-charge documents, add the Net value of the order field. → Choose "New entries" Table: VBAK Field name: NETWR Screen: leave blank Status: 01 Warning: leave blank – Add the Sales office field. Table: VBAK Field name: VKBUR Screen: KKAU Status: 01 Warning: leave blank Note: You can use any status group because incomplete documents cannot be saved (incompletion control was activated in the document type SE##).

1-3-3 Assign the procedure to sales document type ZB##. → Exit → Assign incompletion procedures → Assign procedures to sales document types ZB## → Procedure 60+## Make sure that incomplete documents cannot be saved. → Activate the "Incompletion messages" field

Page 298: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 20

1-4 Customer master record The employees have to be saved in the system as customers so that you can create orders for them. During project planning, it was decided that an individual customer master record is not needed for each employee. Instead, a collective master record (one-time customer account) can be used for employee sales.

1-4-1 Create a customer master record accordingly: Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Business partners → Sold-to party → Create → Create centrally – Customer: SE## – Company code: 1000 IDES AG – Sales area: 1000 10 00 – Account group: CPDA Reference: – Customer: 100016 – Company code: 1000 IDES AG – Sales area: 1000 10 00 → Address screen: – Name: Sales employee ## – Search term: SE## → Sales screen: – Sales office: 1000 Frankfurt – Country: DE – Language key Language of the course → Billing screen: – Incoterms: CPT – Payment terms: 0001 – Tax classification: 1

1-5 Pricing Your sales manager has decided that each employee may receive a basic discount of 15%.

1-5-1 Maintain a master record for customer-dependent discount (K007 customer discount) of 15%. → Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Conditions → Discounts/surcharges → Others → Create → Enter condition type K007

Page 299: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 21

→ Choose "Key combination" → Select "Division/customer"

1-5-2 Optional Better discounts are also available for certain materials. Check whether the access sequence K007 contains an access (customer/material) and, if necessary, supplement this with an exclusive access with sequential number 05 and condition table 005. → Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Conditions → Discounts/surcharges → Others → Create → Enter condition type K007 → Choose "Key combination" → Select "Customer/material" Maintain a discount of 20 % for the new discount. Customer: SE## Material: T-ATN##

1-6 Printing the invoice The system should print the invoice automatically as soon as the sales document has been saved.

1-6-1 Create an output master data record. Use output type RD03. → Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Output → Sales document → Create → Enter output type RD03 The output has been configured so that it is sent to the bill-to party. Set up the master record so that output is printed as soon as the document has been saved. Sales doc type: ZB## Partner function: BP Time: 4

1-6-2 Maintain the following communication data for the output: → Choose "Communication" Output device: LP01 Print immediately: activate Release after output: activate Number of messages: 1

Page 300: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 22

1-7 Sales to employees Test your settings by trying to create a sale to an employee. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create → Enter order type ZB##

1-7-1 Create a sale to an employee. Customer: SE## (Enter any address) → Enter address information In which overview tab page does the system start document processing? Item overview What are the Incoterms? → Sales tab page → CPT (from the customer master record) What are the terms of payment? → Sales tab page → 0001 (from customer master record) Can you save the document and why? No. You haven't entered any items so the net value of the document is zero. Because the "Incompletion messages" indicator was activated, you cannot save an incomplete document.

1-7-2 Enter the following two items Material: T-ATM## (1 piece) Material: T-ATN## (1 piece) What discounts does the system find for material T-ATM##? Analyze pricing. → Select item 10 → Choose "Pricing" → Select "CnTy" (condition type) K007 Item 10 qualifies for a 15% discount. → Choose "Analysis"→ Select "K007" → Choose "Details"→ Access 05 Condition record is missing → Access 10 Condition record has been found → Select "Access 10" → Choose "Details" → System displays the complete access key with material and division Optional Which discount does the system find for material T-ATN##? Does it find the

Page 301: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 23

greater discount for material T-ATN##? Analyze pricing. → Leave analysis → Choose "Next item" → Select "CnTy" (condition type) K007 Item 10 qualifies for a 20% discount. → Choose "Analysis"→ Select "K007" → Choose "Details"→ Access 05 Condition record has been found → Access 10 Condition record exists (deleted manually) → Select "Access 10" → Choose "Details" → System displays the complete access key with material and division

1-7-3 Which item categories did the system find for the items in the sales document? → Goto → Overview → Scroll to the right in the table → Item category: BV##

1-7-4 Save the order. Does the system automatically create a delivery? → Yes. Message in the status bar: SE##-Sales #### has been saved (Delivery #### created) Order number:___________ Delivery number:______________

1-7-5 Check whether the system automatically printed the output when you saved the sales document. → Display sales document → Extras → Output → Header → green traffic light = successfully processed Display the output on your screen. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Display → Sales document → Issue output to → Screen → Choose "Execute" → Choose "Execute".

1-7-6 What type of delivery has been created? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Shipping → Delivery → Display → Header → General header data BV document type Which item category does the system find for the delivery items? → Back (F3) → Scroll right in the table → BV## Post goods issue.

Page 302: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 24

→ Edit → Post goods issue

1-7-7 Create a billing document for the transaction. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Billing → Billing document → Create → Choose "Execute" Which document does the billing document refer to? The sales document Where is this set in Customizing? In item category BV## Billing-relevant indicator: B What is the billing document type? → See title bar of the screen for the billing document type Billing type: BV Billing document number:________________________ Check the accounting document. To which accounts were the incoming payments posted? → Billing document → Change → Choose "Accounting" → Choose "Accounting" → Select accounting document → Choose "Details" → Account number: 100 000 Petty cash 800 000 Sales revenue 888 000 Sales deductions

1-7-8 Did the system automatically determine an output in the billing document for printing the invoice? Why? → Billing document → Display → Header → Output No. As soon as the order was saved, an invoice was printed and given to the customer.

1-7-9 Look at the document flow for the whole process. Check the overal processing status of the individual documents. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Display → Environment → Display document flow

Page 303: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 25

→ Select each document → Choose "Status overview " Order: Completed Delivery: Completed Invoice_ Completed

Page 304: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG

R

Bills of Materials

Page 305: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG

R

Bills of Bills of Materials Materials - Business Background

Several materials can often be sold together as sets or packages. These are stored in the R/3 System as bills of materials (BOMs). Each separate material in the bill can be configured individually.

Your company, IDES specializes in combining PC packages to meet the customer’s individual requirements. The individual components are not ordered until the customer places an actual order. It is your job to create the settings for these packages.

Page 306: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG

R

Bills of Bills of Materials Materials - Requirements

Order

Customer: 2738Order no.: 5718Sales area: 1000/10/00

110 Basic equip. 1 120 Processor 1 130 Memory 4140 Monitor 1 200 Monitor 2

100 PC package 1

Prices?

Purchaseorder?

Delivery note?

Availability?

Transfer of requirements?

n You are a specialist in selling PCs configured according to the individual customer’s requirements. n The components are obtained from a distributor who is in contact with the producers in the Far East. n The components are only ordered from the distributors once the customer has placed an order. This

minimizes the stock in your company’s warehouse as well as capital outlay. n Your customers may also order replacement parts. n The components of the PC come from different vendors. Requirements are therefore transferred to

purchasing at the component level. This means that one order could generate several purchase orders.

n An availability check in the order is not necessary because the components are ordered directly from the distributor.

n The delivery note must contain details of both the PC and all of its components. n The invoice contains the whole package with the quantity that was delivered. All of the components

should be listed in the invoice.

Page 307: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

SAP AG

R

Bills of Bills of Materials Materials - Exploding BOMs in Sales Order 1

The bills of materials are saved in the

system as a master record.

Master recordMaster record

BOM BOM PC PC packagepackage

ComponentsComponentsBasic Basic equipequip. 1 . 1 Processor Processor 1 1 Memory Memory 44. . . . . .

MailMail

Order 5718

Cust.: 2738

100 PC package 1

1. Enter material number with BoM

Page 308: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 5

SAP AG

R

Bills ofBills of Materials Materials - Exploding BOMs in SalesOrder 2

The bills of materials are saved in the system as a master record.

Master recordMaster record

BOM BOM PC PC packagepackage

ComponentsComponentsBasicBasic equipequip. 1. 1ProcessorProcessor 11MemoryMemory 44. . . . . .

MailMail

Order 5718

Cust.: 2738

100 PC package 1

1. Enter material number with BOM

2. System determinesitem category of main

item

Page 309: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 6

SAP AG

R

Bills ofBills of Materials Materials - Exploding BOMs in SalesOrder 3

The bills of materials are saved in the system as a master record.

Master recordMaster record

BOM BOM PCPC packagepackage

ComponentsComponentsBasicBasic equipequip. 1. 1ProcessorProcessor 11MemoryMemory 44. . . . . .

MailMail

Order 5718

Cust.: 2738

110 Basic equip. 1 100 PC package 1

1. Enter material number with BOM

2. System determines item category of main

item

3. Item category explodesthe bill of material

Page 310: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 7

SAP AG

R

Bills ofBills of Materials Materials - Exploding BOMs in SalesOrder

The bills of materials are saved in the system as a master record.

Master recordMaster record

BOM BOM PCPC packagepackage

ComponentsComponentsBasicBasic equipequip. 1 . 1 ProcessorProcessor 1 1 MemoryMemory 44. . . . . .

MailMail

Order 5718

Cust.: 2738

110 Basic equip. 1 100 PC package 1

1. Enter material number with BOM

2. System determines item category of main

item

3. Item category explodes the bill of material

4. System determines theitem categories for the

sub-items

120 Processor 1 130 Memory 4 140 Monitor 1

The material and components in the BOM are controlled by

the item and schedule line categories.

n If there is a bill of material master record for the material, it can be exploded in the sales document. This depends on the settings you make in Customizing.

n The structure is exploded in the following order in the sales document: � .The material that has a bill of material is entered in the order. This is the main item of the bill of

material. � .The system determines the item category of the main item, which controls whether and how the

system should explode the BOM. � .If the BOM should be exploded, the system does it automatically. The components are then

listed in the document as sub-items for the main item. � .The system determines an item category for each sub-item.

n You can control the functions of each item category when you define it. Schedule line categories are determined for every item category and these can also be configured individually.

Page 311: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 8

SAP AG

R

Bills of Bills of Materials Materials - Tasks

l Create bills of materials

l Modify sales document type

l Create your own item category groups

l Create and assign your own item categories

l Identify and assign suitable schedule line categories

l Generate automatic purchase requisition

l Test the bills of materials

Page 312: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 9

Scenario: Bills of Material in Sales and Distribution

• Update document type controls

• Create item category groups

• Create bills of material for Sales and Distribution

• Create and assign item categories

• Create and assign schedule line categories

• Set up automatic purchase requisitions

• Test the process

Your company, IDES, is a trading company that specializes in selling personal computers that have been designed to meet your customer's requirements. You obtain the components from a distributor who is in contact with producers in the Far East. The components are not ordered from the distributor until the customer has placed an order for the PC. This reduces warehouse stock and therefore, capital outlay.

So that you can order the individual components of a PC from different distributors, requirements have to be transferred to the Purchasing department at the component level. This means that one sales order could lead to several purchase orders.

However, the invoice only contains the whole item with the quantity that was delivered.

Your customers are also able to purchase individual spare parts. This means that you must still be able to price the components individually.

The delivery note and the billing document should contain both the PC and all its relevant components. An availability check is not necessary for the order because you procure the components directly from the distributor.

You also want to determine the cost for all components for statistics and controlling purposes.

Change the settings for a bill of material (BOM) in Sales and Distribution so that it can fulfill all these requirements.

Page 313: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 10

1-1 BOMs Save a PC package in your system as a single-level bill of material by using the materials created for you in the training system.

1-1-1 Create a BOM for material T-ATS##: Material: T-ATS## Plant: 1200 Dresden BOM usage: 5 Sales and distribution Valid from: Today Enter the following BOM items with the BOM item category L (stock item): Item 10: T-ATT## 1 piece Item 20: T-ATU## 1 piece Item 30: T-ATV## 4 pieces Item 40: T-ATW## 1 piece

1-1-2 Check whether the items in the BOM are relevant to sales documents. How is this achieved? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

1-1-3 Which item category groups are assigned to the materials in the BOM for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10 in the material master? T-ATS##: _________________________________ T-ATT##: _________________________________ T-ATU##: _________________________________ T-ATV##: _________________________________ T-ATW##: _________________________________

Page 314: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 11

1-2 Create an order Check your new sales and distribution BOM by creating an order in the test system.

1-2-1 Create an order for the BOM you have just created. Order type: ZA## Sales area: 1000 10 00 Customer: T-L63D## PO number: BOM## - 01 Material: T-ATS## (Quantity: 1 piece) Does the system explode the BOM? _________________________________

1-2-2 What item categories are automatically chosen by the system for the main and sub- items? Main item: _________________________________ Sub- items: _________________________________

1-2-3 At what level does pricing take place? _________________________________ Where is this controlled in Customizing? ______________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________

1-2-4 Which items will appear in the billing document and why? _________________________________________________ _________________________________________________

1-2-5 Which schedule line categories does the system find for the main and sub-items? Main item: _________________________________ Sub- item: _________________________________

1-3 Sales document type Although you are using Sales and Distribution BOMs in sales document type ZA##, the

Page 315: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 12

rest of sales processing in your company is the same as that in the R/3 Standard System. Therefore, deliveries are created for delivery type LF and billing documents with billing document type F2.

1-3-1 Check whether the correct default values have been activated in your sales document type and if necessary, change any settings. Delivery type: _____________________________ Order-related billing document type: _____________________________ Delivery-related billing document type: _____________________________

1-3-2 The items in the sales document should be numbered in 100s. If you explode a BOM, the sub- items should be numbered in 10s. Configure your sales document type accordingly. Item no. increment: _________________________________ Sub-item increment: _________________________________

1-4 Item category in the sales order You are using the settings already defined in Customizing for the SAP R/3 Standard System for your BOM settings. Therefore, copy the item categories from the standard system. You want the following to take place in your BOMs: – Pricing should be calculated for the whole package. – The delivery note should contain all the items in the package. – The invoice should contain the main item and its components with the quantities that were actually delivered. – The whole BOM should be exploded in the sales document.

1-4-1 The settings that you configure in the main item are valid for the whole package. Create a new item category ZH## with description Package##-MI by copying item category TAQ. Name: ZH## Description: Package##-MI

Page 316: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 13

1-4-2 If necessary, change the item category ZH## to meet your needs. Note the Pricing, Relev. for billing, Sched. line allowed, Structure scope, Application and Determine cost fields. Pricing: _________________________________ Relev. for billing: _________________________________ Sched. line allowed: _________________________________ Determine cost: _________________________________ Structure scope: _________________________________ Application: _________________________________

1-4-3 The settings at the sub-item level control all of the tasks that you want to implement separately for each item. Create a new item category ZU## with description Package##-SI by copying item category TAE. Name: ZU## Description: Package##-SI

1-4-4 If necessary, change item category ZU## so that it meets your requirements. Note the Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope, Application and Determine cost fields. Pricing: _________________________________ Relev. for billing: _________________________________ Sched. line allowed: _________________________________ Determine cost: _________________________________ Structure scope: _________________________________ Application: _________________________________

1-4-5 If you want to sell the computer parts separately, there should be a separate item category in the sales document. Create a new item category ZN## with description PC parts## by copying TAN. Name: ZN## Description: PC parts##

1-4-6 If necessary, change item category ZN## to meet your requirements. Note the Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope, Application and Determine cost fields. Pricing: _________________________________ Relev. for billing: _________________________________ Sched. line allowed: _________________________________ Determine cost: _________________________________ Structure scope: _________________________________ Application: _________________________________

Page 317: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 14

1-5 Define item category group To be able to use the controls that have been defined for BOMs in the standard system, you decide to create a third, independent control.

1-5-1 Define the new item category group Z0## with description MTPOS Group##.

1-5-2 Change the item category group of your BOM product T-ATS## to Z0##.

1-6 Assign item categories The new item categories should be used in the sales document type ZA##.

1-6-1 Configure the settings so that the system finds the new item category ZH## Package##-MI for the main item of the BOM.

1-6-2 Configure the settings so that the system finds the new item category ZU## Package##-SI for the sub- items in the BOM.

1-6-3 Configure the settings so that when you sell individual computer parts, the system finds the new item category ZN## PC parts## and no other alternatives are possible.

1-7 Schedule line category The components should be automatically ordered from the distributor when the sales order has been saved. Two schedule line categories have been created in the training system for your group.

1-7-1 Which setting in the schedule line category ensures that a delivery item is created from the schedule line? _______________________________________________________________

1-7-2 Which setting in the schedule line category ensures that goods issue is posted to inventory management? _______________________________________________________________

Page 318: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 15

1-7-3 Schedule line category ZH with description HP-606 has been created to control the main item. Check the following fields in Customizing: Item rel.f.dlv: _________________________________ Movement type: _________________________________ Transfer of requirements: _________________________________ Availability check: _________________________________

1-7-4 Schedule line ZU purchase order has been created to control the lower-level items. Check the following fields in Customizing: Item rel. f. dlv: _________________________________ Movement type: _________________________________ Transfer of requirements: _________________________________ Availability check: _________________________________

1-7-5 If an order is placed for a PC, you want purchase requisition creation to take place automatically for the components. All the necessary information is contained in the schedule lines in the sales order. Important control parameters were already determined for purchase requisition creation when you defined the schedule line category in the sales order. Check the following entries in the schedule line category for the sub-items in the BOM: Purchase order type:_________________________________ P.req.del.sched: _________________________________ Item category: ____________________________ (purchase requisition) Acct. assigt cat.: _________________________________

1-8 Assign schedule line category

1-8-1 Which MRP type was assigned to each material in the BOM for plant 1200 in the material master record? T-ATS##: _________________________________ T-ATT##: _________________________________ T-ATU##: _________________________________ T-ATV##: _________________________________ T-ATW##: _________________________________

1-8-2 Configure your settings so that the system finds schedule line category ZH HP-606 for the main item in the BOM.

Page 319: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 16

1-8-3 Configure your settings so that the system finds schedule line category ZU purchase order for the sub- items in the BOM.

1-8-4 Configure the settings so that the system finds the schedule line category ZU purchase order for items in category ZN##.

1-9 Item category in the delivery Because the PC to be delivered to the customer consists of individual components, which have all been ordered, you decide that the system should pick the goods at component level.

1-9-1 Ensure that the components in the BOM have to be picked by configuring delivery item category ZU## so that it is the same as delivery item category TAN.

1-9-2 Ensure that the main item in the BOM is not picked.

1-9-3 How does delivery item category ZN## respond with regard to picking? Check and if necessary, change the settings.

1-10 Create an order Test your BOM in a sales order.

1-10-1 Create an order. Document type: ZA## Sales area: 1000 10 00 Customer: T-L63D## PO number: BOM## - 02 Requested dlv. date: in two weeks Material: T-ATS## (Quantity: 1 piece) Does the system explode the BOM? _________________________________

1-10-2 Which item numbers does the system give the BOM? 1st item: _________________________________ 2nd item: _________________________________ 3rd item: _________________________________ 4th item: _________________________________ 5th item: _________________________________

1-10-3 Does the system automatically use your item categories for the main and sub-items?

Page 320: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 17

Main item: _________________________________ Sub-items: _________________________________

1-10-4 Does the system automatically use your schedule line categories? Schedule line category for main item: ____________________________ Schedule line category for sub-item: ____________________________

1-10-5 Check whether the system automatically generates a purchase requisition when you save the document. _________________________________

1-10-6 Check whether the settings in schedule line category ZU are automatically transferred to the purchase requisition. Document type: _________________________________ Item category: _________________________________ Account assignment category: _________________________________

1-10-7 Your customer adds two more monitors to the orginal order. Change the order and enter an item with material T-ATW##. What is the item number of this item? Number: _________________________________

1-10-8 Which item and schedule line categories does the system use for the new item? Item category: _________________________________ Schedule line category: _________________________________

1-10-9 Did the system calculate a price for this material and if so, why? ___________________________________________________

1-10-10 You can call up the purchase requisition directly from the sales document and edit it there. Branch to the purchase requisition from the order.

1-10-11 Deliver the order. Does the system explode the BOM in the delivery note? _________________________________ Pick the delivery by creating a transfer order (warehouse number: 012). Post goods issue.

1-10-12 Bill the delivery. Does the system explode the BOM in the billing document? _________________________________

Page 321: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 18

Do the prices appear in the billing document? _________________________________ Main item: _________________________________ Sub-item: _________________________________

Page 322: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 19

Scenario: Bills of Material in Sales and Distribution

• Update document type controls

• Create item category groups

• Create bills of material for Sales and Distribution

• Create and assign item categories

• Create and assign schedule line categories

• Set up automatic purchase requisitions

• Test the process

Your company, IDES, is a trading company that specializes in selling personal computers that have been designed to meet your customer's requirements. You obtain the components from a distributor who is in contact with producers in the Far East. The components are not ordered from the distributor until the customer has placed an order for the PC. This reduces warehouse stock and therefore, capital outlay.

So that you can order the individual components of a PC from different distributors, requirements have to be transferred to the Purchasing department at the component level. This means that one sales order could lead to several purchase orders.

However, the invoice only contains the whole item with the quantity that was delivered.

Your customers are also able to purchase individual spare parts. This means that you must still be able to price the components individually.

The delivery note and the billing document should contain both the PC and all its relevant components. An availability check is not necessary for the order because you procure the components directly from the distributor.

You also want to determine the cost for all components for statistics and controlling purposes.

Change the settings for a bill of material (BOM) in Sales and Distribution so that it can fulfill all these requirements.

Page 323: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 20

1-1 BOMs Save a PC package in your system as a single-level bill of material by using the materials created for you in the training system.

1-1-1 Create a BOM for material T-ATS##: Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Bills of material → Bill of material → Material BOM → Create Material: T-ATS## Plant: 1200 Dresden BOM usage: 5 Sales and distribution Valid from: Today Enter the following BOM items with the BOM item category L (stock item): Item 10: T-ATT## 1 piece Item 20: T-ATU## 1 piece Item 30: T-ATV## 4 pieces Item 40: T-ATW## 1 piece

1-1-2 Check whether the items in the BOM are relevant to sales documents. Bill of material → Material BOM → Change → Select items → Goto → Item → Status/long text How is this achieved? The item has been given the status "relevant to sales". When you create a BOM, this status is automatically activated because the BOM has been created as a Sales and Distribution BOM. (Usage indicator: 5 Sales and distribution).

1-1-3 Which item category groups are assigned to the materials in the BOM for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10 in the material master? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Material → Trading goods → Display → Choose "Sales: Sales Org. Data 2" view T-ATS##: ERLA T-ATT##: NORM T-ATU##: NORM T-ATV##: NORM T-ATW##: NORM

Page 324: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 21

1-2 Create an order Check your new sales and distribution BOM by creating an order in the test system.

1-2-1 Create an order for the BOM you have just created. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create Order type: ZA## Sales area: 1000 10 00 Customer: T-L63D## PO number: BOM## - 01 Material: T-ATS## (Quantity: 1 piece) Does the system explode the BOM? Yes

1-2-2 What item categories are automatically chosen by the system for the main and sub- items? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create → Choose "Sales" tab page Main item: TAQ Sub- items: TAE

1-2-3 At what level does pricing take place? → Select item → Choose "Pricing" Pricing occurs at the main item, not at the sub-item level. Where is this controlled in Customizing? IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories → Select TAQ/TAE → Choose "Details" – TAQ is relevant to pricing – TAE is not relevant to pricing

Page 325: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 22

1-2-4 Which items will appear in the billing document and why? IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories → Select TAQ/TAE → Choose "Details" Only the main item. Only item category TAQ is relevant to billing.

1-2-5 Which schedule line categories does the system find for the main and sub-items? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Change → Select item → Choose "Sched. lines" Main item: CN Sub- item: CT

1-3 Sales document type Although you are using Sales and Distribution BOMs in sales document type ZA##, the rest of sales processing in your company is the same as that in the R/3 Standard System. Therefore, deliveries are created for delivery type LF and billing documents with billing document type F2.

1-3-1 Check whether the correct default values have been activated in your sales document type and if necessary, change any settings. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Header → Define sales document types → Select ZA## → Choose "Details" Delivery type: LF Order-related billing document type: F2 Delivery-related billing document type: F2

1-3-2 The items in the sales document should be numbered in 100s. If you explode a BOM, the sub- items should be numbered in 10s. Configure your sales document type accordingly. Item no. increment: 100 Sub-item increment: 10

Page 326: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 23

1-4 Item category in the sales order You are using the settings already defined in Customizing for the SAP R/3 Standard System for your BOM settings. Therefore, copy the item categories from the standard system. You want the following to take place in your BOMs: – Pricing should be calculated for the whole package. – The delivery note should contain all the items in the package. – The invoice should contain the main item and its components with the quantities that were actually delivered. – The whole BOM should be exploded in the sales document.

1-4-1 The settings that you configure in the main item are valid for the whole package. Create a new item category ZH## with description Package##-MI by copying item category TAQ. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories → Select TAQ → Choose "Copy" Name: ZH## Description: Package##-MI

1-4-2 If necessary, change the item category ZH## to meet your needs. Note the Pricing, Relev. for billing, Sched. line allowed, Structure scope, Application and Determine cost fields. Pricing: X Standard pricing Relev. for billing: A Relevant for delivery-related billing Sched. line allowed: activated Determine cost: activated Structure scope: A Explode single-level bill of material Application: SD01 Sales and Distribution

1-4-3 The settings at the sub-item level control all of the tasks that you want to implement separately for each item. Create a new item category ZU## with description Package##-SI by copying item category TAE. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories → Select TAE → Choose "Copy" Name: ZU## Description: Package##-SI

1-4-4 If necessary, change item category ZU## so that it meets your requirements. Note the Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope,

Page 327: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 24

Application and Determine cost fields. Pricing: Empty (no pricing) Relev. for billing: A relevant for delivery-related billing Sched. line allowed: Activated Determine cost: Activated Structure scope: Empty (do not explode material structure) Application: Empty

1-4-5 If you want to sell the computer parts separately, there should be a separate item category in the sales document. Create a new item category ZN## with description PC parts## by copying TAN. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item categories → Select TAN → Choose "Copy" Name: ZN## Description: PC parts##

1-4-6 If necessary, change item category ZN## to meet your requirements. Note the Pricing, Relevant for billing, Schedule lines allowed, Structure scope, Application and Determine cost fields. Pricing: X Standard pricing Relev. for billing: A Relevant for delivery-related billing Sched. line allowed: Activated Determine cost: Activated Structure scope: Empty (do not explode bill of material structure) Application: Empty

1-5 Define item category group To be able to use the controls that have been defined for BOMs in the standard system, you decide to create a third, independent control.

1-5-1 Define the new item category group Z0## with description MTPOS Group##. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Define item category group → Choose "New entries" Item category group: Z0## Description: MTPOS Group##

Page 328: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 25

1-5-2 Change the item category group of your BOM product T-ATS## to Z0##. → Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Materials → Trading goods → Change → Choose "Sales: Sales Org. Data 2" view Sales Org: 1000 Distribution channel: 10 Item category group: Z0##

1-6 Assign item categories The new item categories should be used in the sales document type ZA##.

1-6-2 Configure the settings so that the system finds the new item category ZH## Package##-MI for the main item of the BOM. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Assign item categories → Choose "New entries" Sales doc. type: ZA## Item cat. group: Z0## Item usage: empty ItemCat-HghLvItem: empty Item category: ZH##

1-6-2 Configure the settings so that the system finds the new item category ZU## Package##-SI for the sub- items in the BOM. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Assign item categories → Choose "New entries" Sales doc. type: ZA## Item cat. group: NORM Item usage: empty ItemCat-HghLvItem: ZH## Item category: ZU##

1-6-3 Configure the settings so that when you sell individual computer parts, the system finds the new item category ZN## PC parts## and no other alternatives are possible. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Assign item categories → Choose "Position" Sales doc. type: ZA## Item category group: NORM

Page 329: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 26

Item category: empty ItemCat-HghLvItem: empty Item category: ZN## (overwrite TAN) → Choose "Details"→ Delete all alternative item categories

1-7 Schedule line category The components should be automatically ordered from the distributor when the sales order has been saved. Two schedule line categories have been created in the training system for your group. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Define schedule line categories → Select any schedule line category → Choose "Details"

1-7-1 Which setting in the schedule line category ensures that a delivery item is created from the schedule line? The "Item relevant for delivery" indicator has to be activated.

1-7-2 Which setting in the schedule line category ensures that goods issue is posted to inventory management? The movement type

1-7-3 Schedule line category ZH with description HP-606 has been created to control the main item. Check the following fields in Customizing: Item rel.f.dlv: activated Movement type: empty Transfer of requirements: empty Availability check: empty

1-7-4 Schedule line ZU purchase order has been created to control the lower-level items. Check the following fields in Customizing: Item rel. f. dlv: activated Movement type: 601 Transfer of requirements: empty Availability check: empty

1-7-5 If an order is placed for a PC, you want purchase requisition creation to take place automatically for the components. All the necessary information is contained in the schedule lines in the sales order. Important control parameters were already determined for purchase requisition creation when you defined the schedule line category in the sales

Page 330: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 27

order. Check the following entries in the schedule line category for the sub-items in the BOM: Purchase order type:NB P.req.del.sched: activated Item category: 0 Normal (purchase requisition) Acct. assigt cat.: E Customer individual requirements

1-8 Assign schedule line category

1-8-1 Which MRP type was assigned to each material in the BOM for plant 1200 in the material master record? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Materials → Trading goods → Display → View: MRP 1 T-ATS##: ND T-ATT##: PD T-ATU##: PD T-ATV##: PD T-ATW##: PD

1-8-2 Configure your settings so that the system finds schedule line category ZH HP-606 for the main item in the BOM. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Assign schedule lines → Choose "Position" Item category: ZH## MRP type: ND SchedLineCat: Change to ZH

1-8-3 Configure your settings so that the system finds schedule line category ZU purchase order for the sub- items in the BOM. Item category: ZU## MRP type: PD SchedLineCat: Change to ZU

1-8-4 Configure the settings so that the system finds the schedule line category ZU purchase order for items in category ZN##. Item category: ZN## MRP type: PD SchedLineCat: Change to ZU

Page 331: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 28

1-9 Item category in the delivery Because the PC to be delivered to the customer consists of individual components, which have all been ordered, you decide that the system should pick the goods at component level. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Shipping → Deliveries → Define item categories for deliveries

1-9-1 Ensure that the components in the BOM have to be picked by configuring delivery item category ZU## so that it is the same as delivery item category TAN. → Mat. no. 0 allowed: Activate → Check quantity 0: A Note about the situation → Check minimum quantity: A Note about the situation → Relevant for picking: Activate → StLocation required: Activate → Determine StLocation: Activate → AutoBatchDeterm.: Activate

1-9-2 Ensure that the main item in the BOM is not picked. → Relevant for picking: Deactivate

1-9-3 How does delivery item category ZN## respond with regard to picking? Check and if necessary, change the settings. If you sell spare parts, they don't need to be picked either. As item category ZN## was created by copying TAN, you do not need to change the settings for picking for this delivery item category.

Page 332: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 29

1-10 Create an order Test your BOM in a sales order.

1-10-1 Create an order. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create Document type: ZA## Sales area: 1000 10 00 Customer: T-L63D## PO number: BOM## - 02 Requested dlv. date: in two weeks Material: T-ATS## (Quantity: 1 piece) Does the system explode the BOM? Yes

1-10-2 Which item numbers does the system give the BOM? 1st item: 100 2nd item: 110 3rd item: 120 4th item: 130 5th item: 140

1-10-3 Does the system automatically use your item categories for the main and sub-items? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Change → Choose "Sales" tab page Main item: ZH## Sub-items: ZU##

1-10-4 Does the system automatically use your schedule line categories? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Change Select item → Choose "Sched. lines" Schedule line category for main item: ZH Schedule line category for sub-item: ZU

1-10-5 Check whether the system automatically generates a purchase requisition when you save the document.

Page 333: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 30

Logistics → Materials management → Purchasing → Requisition → Display Yes

1-10-6 Check whether the settings in schedule line category ZU are automatically transferred to the purchase requisition. Document type: NB Item category: empty (corresponds to entry 0 in schedule line category) Account assignment category: E

1-10-7 Your customer adds two more monitors to the orginal order. Change the order an enter an item with material T-ATW##. What is the item number of this item? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Change Material: T-ATW## (2 pieces) Number: 200

1-10-8 Which item and schedule line categories does the system use for the new item? Item category: ZN## PC parts ## → Choose "Procurement" tab page Schedule line category: ZU purchase order

1-10-9 Did the system calculate a price for this material and if so, why? → Select item → Choose "Pricing" Yes. Item category ZN## is priced by the system.

1-10-10 You can call up the purchase requisition directly from the sales document and edit it there. Branch to the purchase requisition from the order. Select item → Choose "Sched. lines" Select schedule line → Choose "Details"→ Choose "Procurement" tab page Choose "Edit"

1-10-11 Deliver the order. Does the system explode the BOM in the delivery note? Yes

Page 334: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 31

Pick the delivery by creating a transfer order (warehouse number: 012). Post goods issue. → Logistics → Sales and distribution → Shipping → Delivery → Create → Delivery → Save and subseq. functions → Transfer order Whse number: 012 Foreground/background: H Adopt picked quantity: 2

1-10-12 Bill the delivery. Does the system explode the BOM in the billing document? → Logistics → Sales and distribution → Billing → Billing document → Create → Choose "Execute" Yes Do the prices appear in the billing document? → Select item → Choose "Pricing" Main item: No Sub-item: Yes

Page 335: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG

R

Material Determination

Page 336: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG

R

Material Determination Material Determination - Business Background

Materials can be automatically replaced in sales documents.

In the following scenario, it is your job to set up automatic substitution for your company, IDES.

The stock for the old material should be used up for the orders, before you sell the new product. However, you also want to deliver the new product to certain customers.

Page 337: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG

R

Material Material Determination Determination - Order

.

Material determination contains a valid

material master record.

Order

Cust.: 2738

1000 10 00

10 old PC 1 pc

Order no.: 5907

You create an order for the old material.

Master RecordMaster Record

CustomerCustomer: : 27382738

Subst:Subst: new new PCPC

EnteredEntered.:.: old old PCPC

Order

Cust.: 2738

1000 10 00

10 new PC 1 pc

Order no.: 5907

The system automatically enters the new material in

the order.

n You want to use material determination to meet the following requirements: � Special customers always receive the newest model even if a purchase order is created for the old

one by mistake. A warning message should inform the employee who creates the order that the material will be automatically replaced.

� This should also take place if the customer is also the ship-to party in the sales document. � All other customers only receive the new material if they order it specifically. � Once the stock of the old material has been used up, the new material can then automatically

replace the old one in the sales document.

Page 338: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

SAP AG 1999

Material Determination - Condition Technique (6)

Sales doc. type OR

. . .

Procedure A00001

Condition type A001

Access sequence A002

Access:10 2 SlsOrg/DistCh/Ent.mat.

Access:20 1 Material entered

10 0 A001 Material entered20 0 . . .

Access seq. Valid from ToA002 01/01/1998 01/01/2002

Table 2 ð No record available

Table 1 ð Successful access

Entry: MAT-10

Material determination master record

Valid from . . . To . . .Subst.reason: 0002

Substitution material: M-10

Order

Document type: ORSales org. : 1000Dist. channel : 10Division : 00Customer : C1

Material : M-10. . .

n The condition technique provides more flexibility in modeling material determination and product selection.

n You can assign a material determination procedure to each sales document type. The procedure contains all of the Customizing information that the system needs for material determination. The procedure includes one or more defined condition types

n One access sequence (search strategy) is assigned to each condition type. n Each access sequence consists of one or more accesses. n Each access contains exactly one condition table. This represents the search key that the system uses

to search for a valid master record. n You can activate an analysis of the material determination in the sales document. The system then

displays detailed information on how the materials were determined.

Page 339: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 5

SAP AG

R

Material DeterminationMaterial Determination - Customizing

Assigned to sales document type

Material determination procedure

Condition type

Access sequence

Access

Condition table

Star

tSt

art

Material determination master record

!AnalyseAnalyseAnalyse

n You should configure Customizing in the reverse sequence as the system searches for the valid material determination master records for sales orders.

n You can activate the material determination analysis in the sales document. Menu path: Environment ----> Analysis --> Material determination --> On You can use this function to check Customizing in detail and carry out a step-by-step search of the system. This helps you to recognize and correct any incorrect settings quickly and easily.

n Note: The analysis runs during material determination so it must be activated before you enter the items in the document.

Page 340: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 6

SAP AG

R

Material Determination Material Determination - Substitution Reason

Should the material be re-

determined when you create the

delivery?

Order

Cust: 2738

1000 10 00

10 new PC 1 pc

Order no.: 5907

Delivery

Cust: 2738

1000 10 00

10 new PC 1pc

Order no.: 5907

?Orderconfirmation

Old PC 1 pc

Which material appears in the

order confirmation?

n If the system automatically replaces the old material because it is no longer available (= automatic product selection), you can re-execute substitution when you create a delivery. This is useful if the amount of available material changes between creating the order and the delivery.

n Depending on your settings in Customizing, the order confirmation can contain either the material that was ordered or the substitution material.

Page 341: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 7

SAP AG

R

Material Determination Material Determination - Tasks

l Create a new material master record

l Create a new condition table

l Set up a new access sequence

l Set up a new condition type for material determination

l Set up a new procedure for material determination

l Create a new reason for substitution

l Create master records for material determination

l Test the effect of material determination in the order, delivery and order confirmation

Page 342: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 8

Scenario: Material Determination

• Build and execute condition technique in material determination

• Define and assign material determination procedure

• Define material determination type

• Define access sequences

• Define condition tables

• Define a reason for substitution

• Create master records

• Test process

Your company IDES sells computers and computer parts. Recently you have added new products to your stock.

It is your job to configure the sales and distribution model so that special customers always receive a new product when they order the old one. All other customers should continue to receive the old product until stocks run out.

Up until now, you have been using material determination with the standard Customizing settings that were delivered in your R/3 System. In this exercise, you will change material determination to meet your new requirements.

1-1 Material master record: Your monitor T-ATQ## is one of the most successful trading goods in the engineering industry and therefore, your company is constantly updating it.

1-1-1 Create a material master record for the new product T-ATR##. Use the previous model T-ATQ## as a reference. Maintain the following views: – Basic data 1 and 2 – MRP 1-4 – Sales:Sales org. Data 1 and 2 – Forecasting – Sales: General/Plant data – Storage 1 and 2 – Sales Text – Accounting 1 and 2 Create the material in the following organizational units:

Page 343: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 9

Plant: 1200 Sales organization: 1000 Storage location: 0001 Distribution channel: 10 Use the same organization units for your copy. Copy the data from the previous model and add or change the following fields: – Basic data 1: Material description: NewScreen ## Old material number: ##LO606-06 Net weight: 15 kg Gross weight: 16 kg – Sales 2: Pricing ref. material: M-15 – MRP 2: Issue stor. location: 0001 – Accounting 1: Standard price: 1600

1-1-2 Post 1000 pieces to the unrestricted-use stock (movement type: 561, plant: 1200, storage location: 0001).

1-2 Condition table In the condition table, you define the fields in the sales document whose data the system should use to find a valid master record for material determination.

1-2-1 Create the new condition table 6## so that you can use it for creating master records for material determination. The new condition table should allow you to create master records that are only effective for certain customers and materials. You want to be able to restrict the validity of the master records. Use condition table 002 as a reference. Condition table: 6## Reference condition table: 002 Description: Customer / Material ## Note: Make sure that the material you want to enter appears as the last key field in the condition table. This means that the system checks the header fields first (for example, customer) and then the item fields in the condition table, which improves system performance.

1-2-2 When you set up the condition table, you can determine what the screen for processing master records in the new condition table looks like. For efficient maintenance of master records, you should be able to process the

Page 344: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 10

customer and material numbers in separate lines.

1-2-3 Generate the new condition table. Note: Create the new object in the Data Dictionary for development class $TMP. It is then a local object and cannot be transported.

1-2-4 What information do you receive in the log?

1-3 Access sequence The access sequence is the strategy used by the system to search for valid master records for a particular condition type. The access sequence contains one or more search steps (= accesses). Each access contains a condition table which determines the key fields for the search. These are the document fields that the system uses to search for valid master records. Define a new access sequence containing three steps that the system can use to search for master records in material determination: 1. Was a master record stored for the material and the sold-to party? 2. Was a master record stored for the material and the ship-to party? 3. Was a master record stored for the material that substitutes the material depending on availability?

1-3-1 Define the new access sequence. AcSq (access sequence): Z0## Description: Search strategy ##

1-3-2 The material should be substituted in the first access if there is a valid master record for the customer and the entered material.

1-3-3 Branch to the fields in the condition table entered and look at the settings. Which field in the sales document does the system use to determine the customer number? _________________________________

1-3-4 Substitution should take place in the second access if there is a valid master record for the ship-to party and entered material.

1-3-5 In the third step, the system should only search for valid master records in material determination using the material entered. This is the standard setting in the R/3 System. Check the fields in the access.

Page 345: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 11

1-3-6 Save the new access sequence and create your own change request. Short description: Access sequence group ##

1-4 Condition type for material determination You can represent material determination with different search strategies. You have to create an individual condition type for each search strategy that you use in the business process.

1-4-1 Create a new condition type with the access sequence that you have just defined. CType (condition type): Z0## Name: Condition type ## Access sequence: Z0##

1-4-2 Customize the condition type so that when you create a master record, the system automatically proposes a validity period from today to the end of the year.

1-5 Material determination procedure All the tasks that are undertaken in the business process for material determination are anchored in a procedure for material determination. The material determination procedure contains one or more condition types and each condition type can refer to its own access sequence. Define a new procedure. Proc. (material determination procedure): Z000## Description: Group procedure ##

1-5-1 Copy the condition type you defined earlier into the procedure. Step: 10 Cntr (counter): leave blank Condition type: Z0##

1-5-2 Assign the new determination procedure to sales document type ZA##.

1-6 Create reason for substitution Create a reason for substitution (Z## Substitution ##) for material determination, with the following characteristics:

Page 346: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 12

– The order confirmation should contain the material ordered by the customer. – The system should issue a warning message before it substitutes a material. – Substitution should take place automatically (i.e. without a selection screen). – The system should not generate any lower- level items in the document when it substitutes a material.

1-7 Create master records Create a master record for material determination.

1-7-1 T-L63B## is one of your special customers. Ensure that this customer always receives the new material in future orders, even if the sales order department enters an order for the old material by mistake. Use your substitution reason.

1-7-2 Ensure that this customer also always receives the new material in future orders when he or she is entered as the ship-to party in a sales process and an order is created with the old material. Use your substitution reason.

1-7-3 Enter another master record in which you ensure that material T-ATR## automatically replaces material T-ATQ## once the latter is no longer available. This should take place for all orders for material T-ATQ## regardless of the ordering party. The material should only be substituted in the sales document. The subsequent delivery document should copy the details from the sales order. Choose a relevant substitution reason. Note: The master record must contain the materials to be substituted, T-ATQ## and T-ATR##, in the correct sequence.

1-8 Create output Create a master record for output type BA00 Order confirmation for document type ZA##. Output type: BA00 Sales document type: ZA## Copy the default values from the output type by choosing Enter. Maintain printer LP01 as the output device and set the number of messages to 1.

1-9 Create an order Test your settings for material determination in the sales document.

Page 347: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 13

1-9-1 According to the master record you have created for material determination, customer T-L63B## should always receive the new product T-ATR##. Create a standard order for customer T-L63B## and the old product T-ATQ## (10 pieces) (purchaser order number: MatDeter##01). Did the system substitute the material? _________________________________ Why? _________________________________

1-9-2 Create the same order for sales document type ZA## (purchase order number: MatDeter##02). Did the system substitute the material? _________________________________ Check the substitution reason in the sales document. Substitution reason: Z## Display the order confirmation on the screen. Which material is displayed in the printout? Material: _________________________________ Why? _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________

Page 348: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 14

1-9-3 T-L63B## is also the ship-to party for your customer T-L63C##. Create an order for ship-to party T-L63B##. Ship-to party: T-L63B## Sold-to party: T-L63C## Purchase order no: MatDeter##03 Activate the material determination analysis (before entering the item). _______________________________________________________________ Material: T-ATQ## (10 pieces) Did the system substitute the material for the ship-to party? _______________________________________________________________ Did the system display a warning message for the substitution? _______________________________________________________________ Use the analysis to check your Customizing settings for material determination. _______________________________________________________________ Use the analysis to check which date the system uses in the document to check the validity date of the master record? _______________________________________________________________

1-9-4 Enter another order for sales document type ZA## for a normal customer. Customer: T-L63A## PO number: MatDeter##04 Material: T-ATQ## (10 pieces) Check the substitution reason in the sales document. Substitution reason: ______________________________________________ Display the order confirmation on the screen. Which materials are displayed in the printout? Material: ____________________________________________________ Material: ____________________________________________________ Why? _______________________________________________________________

Page 349: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 15

1-9-5 Check the available stock for material T-ATQ##. Stock: _________________________________ Change the last order and enter a new item with a quantity that exceeds the available quantity. Which materials and quantity does the system automatically use when substituting this material? Material: _________________________________ Material: _________________________________ Check the order confirmation on the screen. Does the system display both substituted materials? _________________________________

1-9-6 Post 50 pieces of material T-ATQ## to stock. (Plant: 1200; storage location: 0001; movement type: 561). Deliver the last order. Compare the quantities in the order and the delivery. Are there any differences? Why? ______________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________

Page 350: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 16

Scenario: Material Determination

• Build and execute condition technique in material determination

• Define and assign material determination procedure

• Define material determination type

• Define access sequences

• Define condition tables

• Define a reason for substitution

• Create master records

• Test process

Your company IDES sells computers and computer parts. Recently you have added new products to your stock.

It is your job to configure the sales and distribution model so that special customers always receive a new product when they order the old one. All other customers should continue to receive the old product until stocks run out.

Up until now, you have been using material determination with the standard Customizing settings that were delivered in your R/3 System. In this exercise, you will change material determination to meet your new requirements.

1-1 Material master record: Your monitor T-ATQ## is one of the most successful trading goods in the engineering industry and therefore, your company is constantly updating it.

1-1-1 Create a material master record for the new product T-ATR##. Use the previous model T-ATQ## as a reference. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Material → Trading goods → Create → Industry sector: M Maintain the following views:

Page 351: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 17

– Basic data 1 and 2 – MRP 1-4 – Sales:Sales org. Data 1 and 2 – Forecasting – Sales: General/Plant data – Storage 1 and 2 – Sales Text – Accounting 1 and 2 Create the material in the following organizational units: Plant: 1200 Sales organization: 1000 Storage location: 0001 Distribution channel: 10 Note: Make sure that you complete both the organizational levels and copy from fields with the information above. Use the same organization units for your copy. Copy the data from the previous model and add or change the following fields: – Basic data 1: Material description: NewScreen ## Old material number: ##LO606-06 Net weight: 15 kg Gross weight: 16 kg – Sales 2: Pricing ref. material: M-15 – MRP 2: Issue stor. location: 0001 – Accounting 1: Standard price: 1600

1-1-2 Post 1000 pieces to the unrestricted-use stock (movement type: 561, plant: 1200, storage location: 0001). Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management Goods movement → Goods receipt → Other Movement type: 561 Plant: 1200 Storage location: 0001

Page 352: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 18

1-2 Condition table In the condition table, you define the fields in the sales document whose data the system should use to find a valid master record for material determination. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Material Determination

1-2-1 Create the new condition table 6## so that you can use it for creating master records for material determination. The new condition table should allow you to create master records that are only effective for certain customers and materials. You want to be able to restrict the validity of the master records. Use condition table 002 as a reference. → Maintain prerequisites for material determination → Condition tables - Create material determination Condition table: 6## Reference condition table: 002 Description: Customer / Material ## → Double-click on the "Customer" field in the FieldCatlg column. Note: Make sure that the material you want to enter appears as the last key field in the condition table. This means that the system checks the header fields first (for example, customer) and then the item fields in the condition table, which improves system performance.

1-2-2 When you set up the condition table, you can determine what the screen for processing master records in the new condition table looks like. For efficient maintenance of master records, you should be able to process the customer and material numbers in separate lines. → Choose "Technical view" → Activate the "Line" button for the "Customer" key field.

1-2-3 Generate the new condition table. Note: Create the new object in the Data Dictionary for development class $TMP. It is then a local object and cannot be transported. → Choose "Generate" → Development class: $TMP → Choose "Local object"

1-2-4 What information do you receive in the log? The log indicates that the new table was activated and that the condition

Page 353: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 19

record screens are ready to be generated. The system does not generate the screens for entering condition records immediately but when you create a master record with the new key combination (= condition table) for the first time.

1-3 Access sequence The access sequence is the strategy used by the system to search for valid master records for a particular condition type. The access sequence contains one or more search steps (= accesses). Each access contains a condition table which determines the key fields for the search. These are the document fields that the system uses to search for valid master records. Define a new access sequence containing three steps that the system can use to search for master records in material determination: 1. Was a master record stored for the material and the sold-to party? 2. Was a master record stored for the material and the ship-to party? 3. Was a master record stored for the material that substitutes the material depending on availability?

1-3-1 Define the new access sequence. → Maintain prerequisites for material determination → Maintain access sequences → Choose "New entries" AcSq (access sequence): Z0## Description: Search strategy ##

1-3-2 The material should be substituted in the first access if there is a valid master record for the customer and the entered material. → Select access sequence Z0## → Choose "Accesses" → Choose "New entries" → AcNo field: 10 → Tab field: 6##

1-3-3 Branch to the fields in the condition table entered and look at the settings. → Select Access 10 → Choose "Fields" → SAVE at this point only Which field in the sales document does the system use to determine the customer number? The system checks the KUNNR field. In the order, this is the field with the

Page 354: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 20

sold-to party's customer number.

1-3-4 Substitution should take place in the second access if there is a valid master record for the ship-to party and entered material. → Choose "Accesses" → AcNo field: 20 → Tab field: 6## → Select Access 20 → Choose "Fields" → Select KUNNR field → Choose "Details" → Select ship-to party (KUNWE)

1-3-5 In the third step, the system should only search for valid master records in material determination using the material entered. This is the standard setting in the R/3 System. Check the fields in the access. → Choose "Accesses" → Choose "New entries" → AcNo field: 30 → Tab field: 001 → Select Access 30 → Choose "Fields"

1-3-6 Save the new access sequence and create your own change request. → Save → Choose "Create request" Short description: Access sequence group ## → Save → Assign request number to your change request by choosing "Enter".

1-4 Condition type for material determination You can represent material determination with different search strategies. You have to create an individual condition type for each search strategy that you use in the business process.

1-4-1 Create a new condition type with the access sequence that you have just defined. → Maintain prerequisites for material determination → Define type of material determination → Choose "New entries" CType (condition type): Z0## Name: Condition type ## Access sequence: Z0##

Page 355: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 21

1-4-2 Customize the condition type so that when you create a master record, the system automatically proposes a validity period from today to the end of the year. Valid from: leave blank Valid to: 2

1-5 Material determination procedure All the tasks that are undertaken in the business process for material determination are anchored in a procedure for material determination. The material determination procedure contains one or more condition types and each condition type can refer to its own access sequence. Define a new procedure. → Maintain prerequisites for material determination → Maintain procedure for material determination → Choose "New entries" Proc. (material determination procedure): Z000## Description: Group procedure ##

1-5-1 Copy the condition type you defined earlier into the procedure. → Select procedure Z000## → Choose "Control"→ New entries Step: 10 Cntr (counter): leave blank Condition type: Z0##

1-5-2 Assign the new determination procedure to sales document type ZA##. → Assign material determination to sales document types → Select entry ZA## → Enter procedure Z000##

Page 356: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 22

1-6 Create reason for substitution Create a reason for substitution (Z## Substitution ##) for material determination, with the following characteristics: → Define substitution reasons → Choose "New entries" Subst reason: Z## Description: Substitution ## – The order confirmation should contain the material ordered by the customer. – The system should issue a warning message before it substitutes a material. – Substitution should take place automatically (i.e. without a selection screen). – The system should not generate any lower- level items in the document when it substitutes a material. Entry field: activate Warning field: activate Strategy field: leave blank Outcome field: leave blank

1-7 Create master records Create a master record for material determination. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Material Determination → Create

1-7-1 T-L63B## is one of your special customers. Ensure that this customer always receives the new material in future orders, even if the sales order department enters an order for the old material by mistake. Use your substitution reason. Material determin. type:Z0## → Choose "Key combination"→ Select "Customer/Material ##" Customer: T-L63B## Material: T-ATQ## Material: T-ATR## Reason: Z##

1-7-2 Ensure that this customer also always receives the new material in future orders when he or she is entered as the ship-to party in a sales process and an order is created with the old material. Use your substitution reason. This has already been guaranteed by the first master record.

1-7-3 Enter another master record in which you ensure that material T-ATR## automatically replaces material T-ATQ## once the latter is no longer available.

Page 357: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 23

This should take place for all orders for material T-ATQ## regardless of the ordering party. The material should only be substituted in the sales document. The subsequent delivery document should copy the details from the sales order. Choose a relevant substitution reason. Note: The master record must contain the materials to be substituted, T-ATQ## and T-ATR##, in the correct sequence. Material determin. type:Z0## → Choose "Key combination"→ Select material entered MatEntered: T-ATQ## Material: T-ATQ## (at first T-ATQ## should be delivered) Reason: 0006 → Select entry → Choose "Alternative materials" Material: T-ATR## (is used once T-ATQ## is no longer available)

1-8 Create output Create a master record for output type BA00 Order confirmation for document type ZA##. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Output → Sales document → Create Output type: BA00 Sales document type: ZA## Copy the default values from the output type by choosing Enter. → Choose "Communication" Maintain printer LP01 as the output device and set the number of messages to 1.

Page 358: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 24

1-9 Create an order Test your settings for material determination in the sales document.

1-9-1 According to the master record you have created for material determination, customer T-L63B## should always receive the new product T-ATR##. Create a standard order for customer T-L63B## and the old product T-ATQ## (10 pieces) (purchaser order number: MatDeter##01). Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create Did the system substitute the material? No Why? The material determination procedure has been assigned to order type ZA## and not the standard order.

1-9-2 Create the same order for sales document type ZA## (purchase order number: MatDeter##02). Did the system substitute the material? Yes Check the substitution reason in the sales document. → Select item 10 → Choose "Details" → Choose "Sales A" tab page Substitution reason: Z## Display the order confirmation on the screen. Which material is displayed in the printout? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Change → Sales document → Issue output to… → Screen → Select BA00 → Choose "Execute" → Choose "Execute" Material: T-ATQ## Why? The "Entered" key had been activated for substitution reason Z## which controls that the material entered in the order is printed out in the order confirmation.

Page 359: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 25

1-9-3 T-L63B## is also the ship-to party for your customer T-L63C##. Create an order for ship-to party T-L63B##. Ship-to party: T-L63B## Sold-to party: T-L63C## Purchase order no: MatDeter##03 Activate the material determination analysis (before entering the item). Environment → Analysis → Material determination → On Material: T-ATQ## (10 pieces) Did the system substitute the material for the ship-to party? Yes Did the system display a warning message for the substitution? Yes Use the analysis to check your Customizing settings for material determination. Select an entry in each list → Choose "Details" Use the analysis to check which date the system uses in the document to check the validity date of the master record? Requested delivery date

1-9-4 Enter another order for sales document type ZA## for a normal customer. Customer: T-L63A## PO number: MatDeter##04 Material: T-ATQ## (10 pieces) Check the substitution reason in the sales document. Substitution reason: 0006 Display the order confirmation on the screen. Which materials are displayed in the printout? Material: T-ATQ## Material: T-ATQ## Why? The order can be met using T-ATQ## so it is the only material delivered.

Page 360: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 26

1-9-5 Check the available stock for material T-ATQ##. → Select item → Environment → Availability Stock: _________________________________ Change the last order and enter a new item with a quantity that exceeds the available quantity. Which materials and quantity does the system automatically use when substituting this material? Material: T-ATQ## Material: T-ATR## Check the order confirmation on the screen. Does the system display both substituted materials? Yes

1-9-6 Post 50 pieces of material T-ATQ## to stock. (Plant: 1200; storage location: 0001; movement type: 561). Logistics → Materials management → Inventory management Goods movement → Goods receipt → Other Movement type: 561 Plant: 1200 Storage location: 0001 → Choose "Enter" → Material: T-ATQ## (quantity 50) Deliver the last order. → Logistics → Sales and distribution → Shipping → Delivery → Create Shipping point: 1200 Selection date: Today's date + 1 week Compare the quantities in the order and the delivery. Are there any differences? Why? No because of substitution reason 0006: The system only substitutes the material in the order and not in the delivery.

Page 361: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 1

SAP AG 1999

Appendix

l This unit contains extra materials to be used for reference purposes

l This material is not part of the standard course

l As a result, the material might not be used during the course

Page 362: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 2

SAP AG 1999

Appendix: Contents

l Table structures

l Matchcode objects

l Authorization objects

l Delivery block

l Special features of contracts

l Group master contracts

l Menu paths

l IDES data

Page 363: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 3

SAP AG 1999

Table Structure for Customers - SD View

KNVK KNVA KNVS

KNVP KNVD KNVL

KNA1

KNVV KNVI

n These tables contain the following information: KNA1: Customer master, general information KNVK: Contact persons KNVV: Customer master, sales area KNVA: Unloading points KNVI: Tax indicators KNVP: Partner functions KNVD: Documents KNVL: Licenses KNVS: Shipping data

n Logical database for customer master: DD F: Customer database

Page 364: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 4

SAP AG 1999

KNVH

Table Structure for Customer Hierarchies

n This table contains customer hierarchies. You create customer hierarchy nodes as customer master data.

Page 365: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 5

SAP AG 1999

Table Structure for Materials

MCHB

MCHA MLGT

MAPRMVERMBEW MLGNMARC

MAKT MARM MVKE MLAN MAEX

MARA

MCH1

MARD

n These tables contain the following information: MARA: General material data MAKT: Short texts MARM: Conversion factors MVKE: Sales data (for each sales organization and distribution channel) MLAN: Sales data (for each country) MAEX: Export licenses MARC: Plant data MBEW: Valuation data MLGN: Warehouse management inventory data MLGT: Warehouse management inventory type data MVER: Consumption data MAPR: Pointers for forecast data MARD: Storage location data MCH1: Cross-plant batches MCHA: Batches MCHB: Batch stocks

n Logical database for material master: CKM: Material master MSM: Material master

Page 366: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 6

SAP AG 1999

Table Structure for Customer - Material Information

KNMT

KNMTK

n These tables contain the following information: KNMTK: Header table

for increased performance KNMT: Data table

Page 367: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 7

SAP AG 1999

Table Structure for Bills of Material

STZUSTKO

STAS

STPO

STPU

MAST TPSTEQST STSTKDST DOST

n These tables contain the following information: MAST Material assignment to BOM EQST Equipment assignment to BOM KDST Sales order assignment to BOM DOST Document assignment to BOM STST Standard object assignment to BOM TPST Functional location assignment to BOM STKO BOM header data STZU Time-independent STL data STAS BOM item selection STPO BOM item data STPU BOM sub-item data

Page 368: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 8

SAP AG 1999

Table Structure for Sales Activities

VBFA

SADR STXL

VBUV VBPA NAST STXH

VBKA

VBUK

n These tables contain the following information: VBUK: Header status and administrative data VBKA Sales activity VBUV: Incompleteness log VBPA: SD document: Partner SADR: Address VBFA: SD document flows NAST: Output STXH: Texts: Header STXL: Texts: Lines

n Logical database: AK V: Sales documents

Page 369: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 9

SAP AG 1999

Sales Document Tables - Header

STXH/STXLTexts

VBUKHeader status

VEDAContract

VMVAMatchcodes

NASTOutput

PP-StatusJSTO

VBAKHeader

VBKDBusiness data

VEPAPartners

VAKPAPartner indexes

VBUVIncompleteness

VBFADocument flows

n These tables contain the following information: VBUK: Header status and administrative data VBAK: Sales document: Header data VBKD: Sales document: Business Data VAKPA: Partner index VEDA: Contract VBPA: Partner VBUV: Incompleteness log VBFA: SD document flows VMVA: Matchcodes STXH: Texts: Header STXL: Texts: Lines NAST: Output JSTO: PP status

Page 370: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 10

SAP AG 1999

Sales Document Tables - Item

VBKDBusiness data

VEDAContract

VBLBForecast dlv. sched.

VBEPSettings

VBUVIncompleteness

VBFADocument flows

VBPAPartners

JSTOPP status

VBBE/SRequirements

VBUPStatus

VEPVGShipping index

KONVConditions

VAPMAMaterial index

VMVAMatchcodes

STXH/STXLTexts

NASTOutput

CO object

Variants

Technical objects

Services

VBAPItem

n These tables contain the following information: VBUP: Item status VBAP: Sales document: Item data VBKD: Sales document: Business Data VEBA: Contract VBLB: Forecast delivery schedules VBEP: Sales document: Schedule line VBBE: Individual requirements VBBS: Summarized requirements VBUV: Incompleteness log VBFA: SD document flows VBPA: Partner JSTO: PP status NAST: Output STXH: Texts: Header STXL: Texts: Lines KONV: Conditions

Page 371: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 11

SAP AG 1999

Index Tables

VBKOF

VBKPA

VAKPA

VLKPA

VRKPA

VEPVG

VKDFS

VAPMA

VLPMA

VRPMA

VAKGU

VMVA

VMVL

VMCF

VMCR

VBSG

VBFA

VBKOF: SD index: Open sales activities for partner functions VBKPA: SD index: Sales activities for partner functions VAKPA: SD index: Sales orders for partner functions VLKPA: SD index: Deliveries - Partner functions VRKPA: SD index: Billing documents - Partner functions VAPMA: SD index: Order items - Material VLPMA: SD index: Delivery items - Material VRPMA: SD index: Billing items - Material VAKGU: SD index: Validity of inquiries and quotations VEPVG: Shipping due index: VKDFS: SD index: Billing trigger VBFA: SD document flows VMVA: Matchcode object: Sales documents VMVL: Matchcode object: Deliveries VMCF: Matchcode object: Billing documents VMCR: Matchcode object: Invoice lists VBSG: Matchcode object: SD document groups

Page 372: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 12

SAP AG 1999

Customer Matchcodes

Tables

General

Example

Table

Matchcode objectMatchcode object

Matchcode IDsMatchcode IDs

Primary table: KNA1Secondary tables: KNVV

KNVPKNVK

Customer matchcodesDEBI

A Customers - generalS Customers by sales group

etc.

n All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object. n Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode

object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables. n Several matchcode IDs can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields

are used for setting up a search term n Matchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot

be changed.

Page 373: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 13

SAP AG 1999

Contact Partners - Matchcodes

Tables

General

Example

Primary table: KNVKMatchcodes forcontact persons

VKNK

A Contact persons at customerN Contract persons by name

etc.

Table

Matchcode objectMatchcode object

Matchcode IDsMatchcode IDs

n All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object. n Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode

object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables. n Several matchcode IDs can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields

are used for setting up a search term n Matchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot

be changed. n Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.

Page 374: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 14

SAP AG 1999

Material Matchcodes

Example

Tables

General

Primary table: MARASecondary tables: MAKT

MVKEMARCetc.

Material matchcodesMAT1

M Search by descriptionS Sales material for descriptionK Search by classetc.

Table

Matchcode objectMatchcode object

Matchcode IDsMatchcode IDs

n All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object. n Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode

object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables. n Several matchcode IDs can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields

are used for setting up a search term n Matchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot

be changed. n Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.

Page 375: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 15

SAP AG 1999

Bill of Material Matchcodes

Tables

General

Example

Primary table: STZUBOM matchcodes

STZ1

E Equipment by BOM groupM Material by BOM group

etc.

Table

Matchcode objectMatchcode object

Matchcode IDsMatchcode IDs

n All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object. n Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode

object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables. n Several matchcode IDs can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields

are used for setting up a search term n Matchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot

be changed. n Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.

Page 376: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 16

SAP AG 1999

Sales Activity Matchcodes

Tables

General

Example

Primary table: VBUKSecondary tables: VBKA

Matchcode objectVMVK

A Sales activities by code

Table

Matchcode objectMatchcode object

Matchcode IDsMatchcode IDs

n All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object. n Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode

object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables. n Several matchcode IDs can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields

are used for setting up a search term n Matchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot

be changed. n Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.

Page 377: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 17

SAP AG 1999

Sales Order Matchcodes

Tables

General

Example

Matchcode object

Matchcode IDs

Primary table: VBUKSecondary tables: VBKA

Matchcode objectVMVK

A Sales docs by PO numberC Unconfirmed orders

Table

Matchcode objectMatchcode object

Matchcode IDsMatchcode IDs

n All fields used as search terms to access a table are contained in a matchcode object. n Tables whose keys you use for searches are called primary tables. Tables added to the matchcode

object and whose fields can be used to set up search terms are called secondary tables. n Several matchcode IDs can exist for a matchcode object. The matchcode ID determines which fields

are used for setting up a search term n Matchcode IDs used operatively in the SAP system are known as system matchcodes. They cannot

be changed. n Maintain matchcode objects and IDs in the Data Dictionary.

Page 378: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 18

SAP AG 1999

Authorization Objects - Customer Masters

Field groups

Sales area

Authorization group

Customer master

n The authorization group is a four-character, alphanumeric field that you maintain in the customer master.

n Maintain authorization objects for the customer master from the Sales view (sales area and authorization group) in the Sales and Distribution authorization class.

n You can combine as many fields from the customer master as required using field groups. You can define these groups in the 'Logistics general' chapter in the IMG. Maintain the authorization object itself, however, in the Accounting class. Here you will find additional authorization objects for the customer master from the Accounting view, for example company code authorization.

n For detailed information on authorization objects, see the node on authorization management in the Sales and Distribution section of the IMG.

Page 379: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 19

SAP AG 1999

Authorization Objects - Material Masters

Material master - Maintenance status

Control record/Period closing program

Company code

Warehouse no. Sales organization/Distribution channel

Plant

Material master

33

0010001 0002

n Maintain the authorization objects by going to Materials Management -> Master data. n For detailed instructions on authorization objects, see the Implementation Guide.

Page 380: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 20

SAP AG 1999

Authorization Objects - Bills of Materials

Authorization group

Bill of material category BOM usage

Plant

Bills of material

Collective changes Change withoutchange number

n The authorization group is a four-character, alphanumeric field that you maintain in the BOM header.

n Maintain authorization objects for bills of materials in the authorization class for Production Planning.

Page 381: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 21

SAP AG 1999

Authorization Objects - Sales Activities

Employee as partner in sales activity

Activity types and organizational units

Sales activities

n There is exactly one authorization object per sales activity that contains both the sales activity type as well as the following organizational units: sales organization, distribution channel, division, sales office and sales group.

n You can maintain the authorization objects for the CAS sales activity in the Sales and Distribution authorization class.

n A particular enhancement for maintenance of authorization objects is available in the Sales Support area. Even if an authorization object has no authorization, you can still grant maintenance or display authorization to certain employees for individual transactions. In Customizing, assign the special function for the personnel partner type and the permitted activity to the sales activity. If an employee is stored as a partner with this specified role in the sales activity, s/he can then implement these activities. In this way you can define, for example, that the Key Account Manager may display all the customer sales activities, for which s/he is maintained as responsible employee. This is possible although the employee does not have authorization for processing documents in the corresponding organizational units.

n Note: You can find the assignment between employee and partner number in the personal master data. Here you can assign an SAP User ID to a personnel number.

Page 382: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 22

SAP AG 1999

Authorization Objects - Sales Document Types

Sales doc. type

1. Sales document types

2. Sales organization

n There are two authorization objects for sales document types: 1. Sales document type and actions (create, change, display)

2. Sales organization, distribution channel, division, actions

n Maintain authorization objects for sales document types in the authorization class for Sales and Distribution.

Page 383: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 23

SAP AG 1999

Delivery block

Blockgoods issue

Block deliverydue list

Block sales orders

Blockrequirements

Block printing

Block picking

STOP

n Delivery blocks are used to take certain processes out of the normal procedure for particular reasons (such as political instability, insufficient stock, payment difficulties) and to prevent any further automatic processing. This means that the procedure stops until the employee responsible can clarify the situation and decide on what to do, at which point s/he can deactivate the delivery block manually.

n You can define delivery blocks in sales documents at header, item, or schedule line level. The block at item level represents a default value for the schedule line(s) of that item.

n You can also set delivery blocks directly in sales document types or schedule line categories. When you create sales documents, the corresponding blocks are then set automatically at header or schedule line level.

n Customizing the blocking reasons in shipping (transactions OVLS, OVLX) controls the effect of the delivery blocks. At header level, you can control whether the blocking reason prevent you from creating a delivery at all or whether certain steps in the sales process are blocked.

n The delivery of sales documents that are blocked at the header level is only prevented when the blocking reason is assigned to the delivery type in Customizing (transaction OVLX).

n If no assignment is defined, the delivery can be created. The blocking reason then has different effects on the different steps in the sales process. The settings in transaction OVLS determine which individual steps are affected: (Blocks: order / picking / requirements / goods receipt / printing / delivery due list).

n In contrast, a block set at the schedule line level always blocks that schedule line for delivery, regardless of the controls described above.

Page 384: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 24

SAP AG 1999

Cancellation

Yes

Accept cancellation date?

Next possiblecancellation date:

03/31/200xManual input

Sales document / Contract data

Cancellation

Cancellation received: 10/01/200x

Contract start: 04/01/2000Contract end: 03/31/2010

Req. cancellation date: 11/01/200x

n Contracts are frequently extended beyond the original contract duration if one of the contract partners has not cancelled it beforehand.

n Example: The contract begins on April 1st. On October 1st, the customer gives notice to cancel for November 1st. However, because the contract cannot be cancelled before the end of its first year, the system issues a warning. You should accept the next possible cancellation date or enter a different one manually.

n For processing the cancellation of regularly extended contracts, you can define a cancellation procedure that contains one or more cancellation rules. The cancellation procedure can be stored in the contract profile and therefore be controlled as a default value in new contracts.

Page 385: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 25

SAP AG 1999

Customizing for Cancellations

Cancellation rule

0001 Canc. up to 1 wk after start

Contract profile0001

Cancellation procedure

Cancellation procedure

Assignment

Canc.procedure Canc. rule

0001

0001

Cancellation date 02

Time limit:Unit of time:

Canc. period: 1Unit of time: 1 day

Rule valid for: 12

0001

0001 01/01/98 - 12/31/2007

0001

0002

n You can define cancellation rules to meet your requirements. They contain the date rule for determining the cancellation date, cancellation notice period and the validity period for the rule.

n Example: � In the example above the customer can cancel the contract within a week. Within this period, he or

she can cancel it daily (that is, at any point in the week). � Another cancellation rule could determine that the cancellation has to take place annually with a

notice period of three months before the next cancellation date.

Page 386: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 26

SAP AG 1999

Grouping Contracts

Contract 2334

Material Value

M3 5PC 5 000 UNI5 000 UNI

M7 1PC 2 300 UNI2 300 UNI

Customer: Smith Inc. Duluth

Contractalreadyfulfilled

Contract 2376

Material Value

M2 5PC 3 000 UNI3 000 UNI

M4 1PC 1 300 UNI1 300 UNI

Customer: Smith Inc. San Fran.

Contract 2378

Material Value

M2 4PC 5 300 UNI

M5 1PC 230 UNI

Customer: Smith Inc. London

Consistent?

VBKD

VBPA

VBAK FPLN

VEDA

Master contract

Lower-level contracts

Doc. Description

2334 Smith Duluth

2376 Smith San Fran.

2378 Smith New York

Customer: Smith AGHeadquarters

Validity: 01/98- 12/98

GrpRefProced: SDGK

n In companies that use a substantial number of contracts for their business, several contracts will often be subject to the same business requirements. You can store these requirements in a master contract and link it to lower-level contracts.

n The master contract contains general conditions that are valid for all the lower-level contracts that refer to it. This ensures that the general data in all the lower-level contracts is consistent.

n In the standard system, sales document type GK is set up as the master contract. n The group contract only contains header data. There are no items in a group contract. You can use

fields from tables in the document header (VBAK), business data (VBKD), partner data (VBPA), contract data (VEDA) and the data from the billing plan header (FPLA).

n The group master contract displays a list of all the links to lower-level contracts. You can then go to the individual contracts from the list.

n If you activated the Update lower-level contract field in Customizing for master contracts, any changes in your master contract are immediately copied into the lower-level contracts. This triggers a workflow that accesses all the individual lower-level contracts. If any errors occur, the person who changed the master contract receives a workitem for manual processing.

Page 387: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 27

SAP AG 1999

Grouping Contracts - Lower-Level Contracts

Lower-level contracts

Group

contract:

Customer: Smith AGHeadquarters

Validity: 01/98- 12/98

Document: 3167

4000167Header fields are copied

according to the

referencing procedure

Procedure: SDGK

n The lower-level contract is a standard document that contains a reference to the master contract. n When you enter the document number in the master contract field, a link is created to the lower-level

contract. n The link means that the system copies all the relevant fields (set in Customizing) from the master

contract to the current lower-level contract. In the referencing requirements, you can control which fields and contract types are permitted for the link.

n Each time an entry is confirmed, the system checks the reference between the master and lower-level contracts with the rules defined in Customizing for the individual fields.

Page 388: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 28

SAP AG 1999

Referencing Requirements

Table Field name Function Rule MessageVBPA KUNNR SP A þ

VEDA VLAUFZ A þ

VBAK AUGRU C ¨

VBKD INCO1 B þ

Doc. type of lower-level cont. Doc. type of group contract

Target Source

MC Maintenance contract GC Group contract

l Maintain reference sales document types

l Define referencing procedures (SDGK)

n Customizing for master contracts takes place in two steps: 1. Define which contract types are permitted as lower-level contracts for the master contract. For

example, you can configure the settings so that only maintenance contracts can link to master contract MC.

2. Define and configure all the fields needed for the reference in the referencing procedure. For each field, choose one of the three following rules:

Rule A - Unique field The link is only possible if the fields in the master and lower-level contracts are identical.

Rule B - Copying field The system copies the values in these fields from the master contract to the lower-level field. Different values in the lower-level contract are not permitted.

Rule C - Proposal field These fields are only copied from the master contract to the referenced lower-level fields if the data agreed before the master contract was changed. They can be overwritten in the lower-level contract. You can activate a message for each field in the referencing procedure that informs you in the lower-level contract of any changes caused by changes in the master contract.

n In Customizing for contracts, you can activate the function Message: Master contract.

Page 389: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 29

Frequently Used Menu Paths

Activity

Menu path

Master data

Logistics è Sales and distribution è Master data

Display sold-to party è Business partnerè Customer è Display

Display material è Products è Material è Other material è Display

Display bill of material è Products è Bills of Material è Bill of Material è Material BOM è Display

Display condition records (prices, discounts/surcharges, free goods, etc.)

è Conditions è Display

Display output master records è Output è Sales document è Display

Customer-material information è Agreements è Customer-Material Info è Display

Order processing

Logistics è Sales and distribution è Sales

Create/change/display order è Order è Create/Change/Display

Create/change/display inquiry è Inquiry è Create/Change/Display

Create/change/display quotation è Quotation è Create/Change/Display

Create/change/display scheduling agreement è Scheduling Agreement è Create/Change/Display

Create/change/display contract è Contract è Create/Change/Display

Display list of orders è Information system è Orders è List of sales documents

Display list of incomplete orders è Information system è Orders è List of incomplete orders

Page 390: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 30

Shipping Logistics è Sales and distribution è Shipping and Transportation

Create/change/display delivery è Outbound delivery è Create/Change/Display

Create transfer order è Picking è Create transfer order è Single Document

Post goods issue è Post goods issue è Outb. delivery Single Document

Billing

Logistics è Sales and distribution è Billing

Create/change/display billing document è Billing Doc è Create/Change/Display

Display financial accounting documents è Billing Doc è Display è Accounting overview

Page 391: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 31

Customizing

Access

Tools è AcceleratedSAP è Customizing è Project editing è Display SAP Reference IMG

Define organizational units

è Enterprise structure è Definition

Maintain sales organization è Sales and Distribution è Define sales organization ... è Define, copy, delete, check Sales Organization

Maintain distribution channel è Sales and Distributionè Define distribution channel ... è Define, copy, delete, check distribution channel

Maintain division è Logistics - General è Define division ... è Define, copy, delete, check division

Maintain sales office è Sales and Distribution è Maintain sales office

Maintain sales group è Sales and Distribution è Maintain sales office

Assign organizational units

è Enterprise structure è Assignment

Sales organization – Company code è Sales and Distribution è Assign sales Organization - Assign sales organization to company code

Sales organization – Distribution channel è Sales and Distribution è Assign distribution channel to sales organization

Sales organization – Division è Sales and Distribution è Assign division to sales organization

Sales area è Sales and Distribution è Set up sales area

Sales area – Sales office è Sales and Distribution è Sales office – Sales area

Sales office – Sales group è Sales and Distribution è Sales group - Assign sales office to sales group

Sales organization – distribution channel - è Sales and Distribution è Assign sales Organization - Distribution

Page 392: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 32

Plant channel – plant

Page 393: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 33

Master data

è Display SAP Reference IMG

Common distribution channels è Sales and Distribution è Master dataè Define common distribution channels

Common divisions è Sales and Distribution è Master data è Define common divisions

Maintain account group è Logistics – General è Business Partner è Customers è Control è Define account groups and field selection for customers

Maintain material type è Logistics – General è Material master è Basic settings è Material types è Define attributes of material types

Basic functions

è Sales and Distribution è Basic Functions

Define pricing procedure è Pricing è Pricing Control è

Define free goods procedure è Free Goods è Condition Technique for Free Goods

Define output è Output Control è Output Determination è Output Determination using Condition Techniqueè ...

Define material determination procedure è Material Determination è ...

Define listing/exclusion procedure è Listing/Exclusion è ...

Partner determination è Partner determination

Incompleteness procedure è Incompleteness è...

Sales document control

è Sales and distribution è Sales è Sales documents

Header Define sales document types è Sales document header è Define sales document types

Restrict sales document types to organizational units

è Sales document header è Assign sales area to sales document types

Item

Define item category è Sales document item è Define item categories

Assign item category è Sales document item è Assign item categories

Sched. Line Define schedule line categories è Schedule lines è Define schedule line categories

Assign schedule line categories è Schedule lines è Assign schedule line categories

Copying control

è Sales and Distribution è Sales è Maintain copying control for sales

Page 394: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 34

documents

Contracts Define value contracts è Contracts è Value contracts è ...

Define contract data è Contracts è Contract data è ...

Shipping

è Logistics Execution è Shipping

Determine shipping points è Basic Shipping Functions è Shipping and Goods Receiving Point Determination

Document control in shipping è Deliveries è ...

Set up delivery blocks è Deliveries è Define reasons for blocking in Shipping

Lean WM è Picking è Lean WM è ...

Billing

è Sales and Distribution è Billing

Define billing document types è Billing documents è Define billing types

Set up billing blocks è Billing documents è Define blocking reasons in Billing

Copying control for billing documents è Billing documents è Maintain copying control for billing documents

Maintain requirements and forms

è Sales and Distribution è System Modification è Routines è ...

Page 395: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 35

Data Used in the Exercises

Organizational units

Data Training system

IDES system Comments

Company code 1000 1000

Sales area 1000/10/00 1000/10/00

Z000/Z0/00 1000/10/00 Additionally configured

Plant 1000 1000

1200 1200

Shipping point 1200 1200

Account group

Data Training

system IDES system Comments

Account group ZK## 0001 External number assignment

You must allow assignment of the new account group to partner functions AG, WE, RG, and RE in partner control.

Sales Doc. Type

Data Training

system IDES system Comments

Order type ZA## OR

Page 396: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 36

Customer master

Training system

IDES system Comments

T-S62A## 2006

AccGrp: 0001 SA: 1000/10/00

T-S62B##

2007 AccGrp: 0001 SA: 1000/10/00

T-S62C## 2006 AccGrp: ZK## SA: 1000/10/00

T-S62D## 1172 AccGrp: 0001 SA: 1000/14/00

T-S62E## 2006 AccGrp: 0001 SA: 1000/10/00

T-S62F## 2006 AccGrp: 0002 SA: 1000/10/00

Legend: AccGrp: Account group SA: Sales area (Sales organization/Distribution channel/Division)

Personnel master record

Data Training system

IDES system Comments

Personnel master record 1701## 1701

Page 397: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 37

Material master

Training system

IDES system

Comments

T-ATA## M-10 MtType: HAWA Industry: M Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10

T-ATB## M-11 MtType: HAWA Industry: M Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10

T-ATC## M-12 MtType: HAWA Industry: M Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10

T-ATD## M-13 MtType: HAWA Industry: M Plant: 1000 SL: 1000/10 Plant 1200

T-ATE## M-14 MtType: HAWA Industry: M Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10

T-ATF## R-1120 MtType: HAWA Industry: M Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10

T-ATG## R-1130 MtType: HAWA Industry: M Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10

T-FUA## R-1001 MtType: FERT Industry: M Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10

T-ZSA## I1000 MtType: DIEN Industry: M Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10 SL: 1000/14

WKM1 New MtType: HAWA Industry: M Plant: 1200 SL: 1000/10 MtItem: VCIT

Legend: MtType: Material type SL: Sales line (sales organization/distribution channel) MtItem: Item category group To enter sales documents with these materials, perform the following steps: 1. Maintain the material prices 2. Post stocks (movement type 561) or

check the availability with replenishment time (for example, checking group 01) 3. Enter the new material, WKM1, as a value contract material in Customizing of item

category WKN.

Page 398: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 38

SAP AG

R

Service Orders

Page 399: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 39

SAP AG

R

Service OrdersService Orders - Business Background

Many companies do not just sell their products, but also install and maintain them.

In the following scenario, it is your job to implement a service process in your company, IDES. You will need the SD functions in the R/3 Standard System, as your company does not use the Service Management module.

Page 400: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 40

SAP AG

R

Service OrdersService Orders - Order Before Repairs

The request for a repair is created in

the system as a service order.

Before the PC technician travels to the customer,

he takes the required parts from the repairs

workshop.

Order

Cust: 2738

1000 / 10 / 00

10 PC is dead

Order no.: 5718

A PC technician is notified by

automatic mail

MailMail

n A customer phones the service department to request a repair. The employee enters the details in the relevant repair order, including the customer number and a text item describing the repair.

n The employee can enter any particular details (such as type of repair, replacement parts, address) specified by the customer.

n Only complete documents can be saved and they must contain the name of a technician. n When the order is saved, the technician automatically receives a message informing him of the

repair that needs to be done. n A special repairs warehouse contains all the necessary replacement parts and a toolbox. Before the

technician leaves, he or she ensures that they have the necessary equipment.

Page 401: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 41

SAP AG

R

Service OrdersService Orders - Order After Repairs

The service and the resulting expenditure is entered in the order.

Order

Cust: 2738

10 3h repairs20 Hotel30 Journey 40 1 battery

n When the technician has finished the repairs, he or she fills in a form detailing the hours required for the repairs, the hotel, travel costs and the spare parts used.

n Any unused material is sent back to the repairs workshop. n The information in this form is used to enter all services and materials in the order. n As the material specified in the document has already been used, an availability check and transfer

of requirements are not required. n An automatic billing block in the order prevents a billing document from being created too early.

The document is not unblocked until all the items have been entered.

Page 402: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 42

SAP AG

R

Service OrdersService Orders - Delivery

.

Picking is not required. Goods issue is posted automatically e.g. at the

end of each day.

Delivery

Cust:2738

1000 10 00

10 1 battery

Del no: 80002412

The delivery contains the materials used.

X

n Inventory management has to be updated because materials were used. Once all the items have been entered in the order, a delivery can be created and goods issue posted.

n The goods do not need to be picked because they have already been taken from the repairs warehouse.

n Goods issue can be posted manually for a single delivery or automatically in collective processing.

Page 403: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 43

SAP AG

R

Service OrdersService Orders - Billing Documents

An invoice contains all items to be billed and can be created

automatically by collective

processing.

Invoice

Customer: 2738

10 3 h repairs20 Hotel30 Journey40 1 battery

Billing block removed from

order?

n By the time the complete order has been posted, the materials have already been delivered so the order quantity is always the same as the goods issue quantity. This allows the system to create an order-related billing document. Note: The relevant settings must have been configured in copying control.

n All the items in a billing document can be billed together because the billing document for service and material items is related to the order.

n Billing documents can be created manually for single orders or automatically in collective processing, for example, during the night.

Page 404: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 44

SAP AG

R

Service OrdersService Orders - Tasks

l Create a new sales document type

l Configure individual item categories for order and delivery

l Assign suitable schedule line categories to the process

l Extend copying controls

l Add the business partner “PC technician” into the process

l Create automatic output to inform the technician of the commissioned repairs

l Create a text type that can contain special requirements for repairs.

l Test the service order

Page 405: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 45

Scenario: Service Order

• Set up a new document type

• Create service order items

• Set up a partner for the technician

• Create an automatic mail

• Set up text determination (optional)

• Set up copying control

• Test process

Your company maintains and repairs computer equipment at the customer site. The Service Management (SM) component is not used by your company.

One of your customers informs you by telephone that they are having problems with their computer. An experienced employee decides that the problem has to be solved by a technician at the site and decides which spare parts they will need. The technician is automatically informed. He owns a "spare parts" tool box which he fills by taking parts from the warehouse. The order confirmation contains the service (for example, technician category, hours taken) and a reminder that the dollar amount of the invoice depends on the time taken and cost of the repair. The technician returns any unused parts to the warehouse and enters the materials he used, the time the repair took and travelling expenses (for example: taxi, hotel) in an overview sheet. This sheet is used to create an invoice for the customer.

Page 406: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 46

1-1 Sales document type Create a sales document type ZS## with description Service##-order.

1-1-1 Copy the reference OR standard order and use the same copying controls.

1-1-2 Prevent external number assignment.

1-1-3 Prevent the system from reading the customer-material info records.

1-1-4 De-activate the settings for credit limit checks.

1-1-5 De-activate the checks for open quotations and contracts.

1-1-6 Set the billing block 02 No completion confirmation.

1-1-7 De-activate the settings for payment card processing.

1-1-8 Use the current date as the requested delivery item.

1-1-9 Services are processed in distribution channel 14 (Services). Repairs are only carried out in sales organization 1000. Make sure that the new document type ZS## can only be used in sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 14.

1-2 Delivery and transportation scheduling De-activate delivery and transportation scheduling for the new sales document type ZS##. Note: Do this in Customizing for Basic Functions.

1-3 Item: consumable item Check which item category has been assigned to sales document type ZS##.

Page 407: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 47

1-3-1 Which item category does the system determine for materia ls in the item category group NORM? ____________________________________________________________

1-3-2 Why does this assignment already exist for the sales document type ZS## that you created? ____________________________________________________________

1-3-3 When you enter consumable items, the system does not run an availability check, there is no transfer of requirements and picking is not necessary. However, you do need to post goods issue in order to update inventory management. Since the delivery quantity (goods issue quantity) is the same as the order quantity, you can invoice these items using order-related billing, like service items. This means that you can invoice the customer for all the items in the sales document without any further processing. Create the new item category ZS## with description Consum. item ## by copying item category TAN. Configure the item category so that order-related billing is executed. De-activate the Credit Management functions. Configure the system so that it finds the new item category ZS## for materials in item category group NORM in the service order. Do not permit any other item categories. Note: Call up the details screen for the table entry.

1-3-4 Which schedule line category does the system find for the material in your service order that controls the MRP indicator for material T-ATO## (plant: 1200)? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ What is the difference between schedule line category CV and category CN? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ Change the schedule line category assignment so that the system finds schedule line category CN for consumable items such as T-ATO## (plant: 1200).

1-3-5 De-activate the Picking-relevant indicator for item category ZS## in the delivery.

Page 408: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 48

1-4 Copying control You need to configure your copying control so that you can create an order-related billing document for item category ZS## in sales document type ZS##.

1-5 Item: Service Configure your sales document type ZS## so that item category TAD Services is automatically assigned to items with services (materials from item category group DIEN). Do not permit any alternative item categories.

1-6 Partner determination If you need a technician to carry out the repair, you need to record this information in the service order. The technician should then be informed automatically by mail when he is needed. Set up the necessary partner controls to allow this to happen.

1-6-1 Define a new partner function GG with description PC technician ## (GG = ## +10). Choose the suitable partner type for this function.

1-6-2 Define a new partner determination procedure ZS## with description Service procedure ZS## for sales documents and copy the following partner functions into this procedure: – SP Sold-to party – BP Bill-to party – PY Payer – SH Ship-to party – GG PC technician ## Create all the partners as mandatory partners.

1-6-3 Assign procedure ZS## to your sales document type ZS##.

Page 409: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 49

1-7 Output The PC technician entered in your service order should automatically receive a mail telling him when he is needed. This output should be created when you save the sales order and appear automatically as mail in the employee's office inbox.

1-7-1 Create a relevant output type by copying the output type MAIL from the standard R/3 System with all its dependent entries. Key: ZM## Description: Go to customer ##

1-7-2 Maintain appropriate default values for the output master records for output type ZM##.

1-7-3 Create the relevant mail data in the output type. Document title: Service Mail ## Mail text: You have a repair order. Customer: &VBAK-KUNNR& Order: &VBAK-VBELN& Good luck!

1-7-4 Assign the output type ZM## to partner function GG.

1-7-5 Assign a suitable processing program to output type ZM## by copying the entry which controls output type MAIL.

1-7-6 Change the output in output determination procedure V10000 for orders. Add step 60 + ## with condition type ZM## and activate requirement 2. How does this requirement affect the output? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

1-7-7 Create a master record for the new output. Adopt the default values from the condition record.

1-7-8 When your PC technician receives the automatic mail about the customer visit, he should be able to go directly from the mail to the sales document so that he can obtain all the information he needs for the visit. To do this, save the relevant communication data in the master record for output type ZM##:

Page 410: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 50

Parameter: VBAK-VBELN (Sales document number) ID: AUN (Field in transaction that contains the document number) Transaction code: VA03 (Display sales document) Indicate that the output is an express mail.

1-8 Text (optional) When you enter a service order, you want to be able to save specifications about the order as a text in the document (for example, equipment serial numbers, discounts, times, directions, telephone numbers).

1-8-1 Create a new text type for the sales document header: Text ID: ZS## Description: Visit info ##

1-8-2 Check which text determination procedure is used by your sales document type. Procedure: ______________________________________________

1-8-3 Expand this procedure to include your new text type ZS##.

1-8-4 Create a new text type for the sales document item: Text ID: ZS## Description: Repair text ##

1-8-5 Check which text determination procedure is used by item category TATX. Text procedure: ______________________________________________

1-8-6 Add the new item text ZS## to this procedure.

Page 411: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 51

1-9 Customer master record Customer T-L63A## places an order for repairing computer equipment. Extend the customer master record with data from sales area 1000 14 00. Use the data created for sales area 1000 10 00 as your reference.

1-9-1 Extend the relevant customer master record: – Customer: T-L63A## – Sales area: 1000 14 00 – Reference customer: T-L63A## – Sales area: 1000 10 00

1-9-2 Check your company structure to see which delivering plants are permitted for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 14. Enter a valid delivering plant in the customer master record for service processing.

1-9-3 The PC technician brings all the materials he needs to repair the equipment with him and the journey is entered as a separate item in the order, so choose the Free house (FH) Incoterms in the customer master record. You have agreed on the following terms of payment with your customer for service orders: – Payment within 10 days: 2 % – Payment within 30 days: 1 % – Payment within 50 days: no discount – Tax classification: 1

1-10 Material master record: Consumable item During the repair, the monitor has to be replaced (material T-ATO##). Change the material so that your service department (sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 14) can also use it. To do this, copy the values from the sales line 1000 10.

1-11 Material master record: Service material T-ATP## is a service material. Change the material so that it can also be used by your service department (sales line 1000 14). Copy the values from sales line 1000 10, and change the item category group to DIEN.

1-12 Service order Test your settings by processing a service order in the R/3 System.

Page 412: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 52

1-12-1 Enter a service order your customer T-L63A##. Enter sales area 1000 10 00. Does it work? ____________________________________________________________ Why? ____________________________________________________________

1-12-2 Enter a service order for customer T-L63A## but do not enter a sales area. Customer: T-L63A## PO number: Service order ## Sales area: ______________________________________________ Can you enter a sales document number manually? ____________________________________________________________ Why? ____________________________________________________________ What are the terms of delivery for the order? ____________________________________________________________ What are the terms of payment? ____________________________________________________________

Page 413: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 53

1-12-3 Enter a text item which documents the repair. In the Description field, enter the text "PC repairs". Optional: Maintain the repair text ## for the item by entering the number of the PC that needs to be repaired. Optional: Maintain a route description at header level under text type Repair info ##.

1-12-4 Was output type ZM## automatically found for the document? ____________________________________________________________ Why? (You can use the condition analysis for the output to see why.) ____________________________________________________________

1-12-5 Call up the incompletion log. Assign the employee with personnel number 1701## as the PC technician responsible for the order. Note: The personnel master record for employee 1701## contains user ID Mayer-## in info category 105 "Communication".

1-12-6 Save the complete document. Check the processing status of output type ZM## in the document. ____________________________________________________________

1-12-7 Log on as user Mayer-## and password LO606. Call up the output, check the message and call up the document.

1-12-8 Once you have finished the repairs, you enter the service provided in the order. Your technician has installed a new monitor. Set the requested delivery date to one week from today's date. Enter the service and the materials used in the repair in the relevant service order. Replace the text item in the order with the service material. Material: T-ATP## (3 hours) Material: T-ATO## (1 piece) How does the system respond? ____________________________________________________________

Page 414: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 54

Not all the items or schedule lines in a sales document are needed in the delivery and billing documents. Which item and schedule line categories does the system find? Item 10: ___________________________________________ Item 20: ___________________________________________ Check in Customizing which schedule lines from the sales document generate items in the delivery document. Why? Item 10: ____________________________________________________ Item 20: ____________________________________________________

1-13 Delivery Deliver the order (shipping point: 1200). Set the selection date to a week's time.

1-13-1 Which delivery item category does the system find for the consumable item? Delivery item category: _________________________________________

1-13-2 Post goods issue. Is picking necessary? ____________________________________________________________ Why? ____________________________________________________________

Page 415: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 55

1-14 Billing document Bill the order.

1-14-1 What message do you receive? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

1-14-2 Delete the billing block in the sales order.

1-14-3 Bill the order now (selection date a week from today). Do both items due for billing appear in the billing document? ____________________________________________________________

1-14-4 Is the data forwarded to Accounting? ____________________________________________________________

1-14-5 Call up the document flow in Billing. Can you see the delivery? ____________________________________________________________

1-14-6 Call up the document flow from the sales order. Is the process completed as far as sales and distribution is concerned? Why? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

Page 416: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 56

Scenario: Service Order

• Set up a new document type

• Create service order items

• Set up a partner for the technician

• Create an automatic mail

• Set up text determination (optional)

• Set up copying control

• Test process

Your company maintains and repairs computer equipment at the customer site. The Service Management (SM) component is not used by your company.

One of your customers informs you by telephone that they are having problems with their computer. An experienced employee decides that the problem has to be solved by a technician at the site and decides which spare parts they will need. The technician is automatically informed. He owns a "spare parts" tool box which he fills by taking parts from the warehouse. The order confirmation contains the service (for example, technician category, hours taken) and a reminder that the dollar amount of the invoice depends on the time taken and cost of the repair. The technician returns any unused parts to the warehouse and enters the materials he used, the time the repair took and travelling expenses (for example: taxi, hotel) in an overview sheet. This sheet is used to create an invoice for the customer.

1-1 Sales document type Create a sales document type ZS## with description Service##-order.

Page 417: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 57

1-1-1 Copy the reference OR standard order and use the same copying controls. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Header → Define sales document types → Select sales document type OR → Choose "Copy as" Key: ZS## Description: Service##-order

1-1-2 Prevent external number assignment. → Select ZS## → Choose "Details" No. range ext. assgt field: empty

1-1-3 Prevent the system from reading the customer-material info records. Read info record field: empty

1-1-4 De-activate the settings for credit limit checks. Check credit limit field: empty Credit group field: empty

1-1-5 De-activate the checks for open quotations and contracts. Quotation messages field: empty Contract messages field: empty

1-1-6 Set the billing block 02 No completion confirmation. Billing block field: 02 compl. confirmation missing

1-1-7 De-activate the settings for payment card processing. Payment guarantee procedure field: empty Payment card plan type field: empty Checking group field: empty

1-1-8 Use the current date as the requested delivery item. Lead time in days field: empty

1-1-9 Services are processed in distribution channel 14 (Services). Repairs are only carried out in sales organization 1000. Make sure that the new document type ZS## can only be used in sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 14.

Page 418: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 58

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Header → Assign sales areas to sales document types → Assign sales order types permitted for sales areas Delete all the entries for document type ZS## except those for sales area 1000 14 00. Note: You can gain an overview of the available entries by choosing "Variable list".

1-2 Delivery and transportation scheduling De-activate delivery and transportation scheduling for the new sales document type ZS##. Note: Do this in Customizing for Basic Functions. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Delivery Scheduling and Transportation Scheduling → Define scheduling by sales document type DlvSchedlg field: empty TranspSch field: empty

1-3 Item: consumable item Check which item category has been assigned to sales document type ZS##.

1-3-1 Which item category does the system determine for materials in the item category group NORM? IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Assign item categories TAN

1-3-2 Why does this assignment already exist for the sales document type ZS## that you created? When you copied the sales document type OR, all of the entries for item controls were also copied for document type ZS##.

1-3-3 When you enter consumable items, the system does not run an availability check, there is no transfer of requirements and picking is not necessary. However, you do need to post goods issue in order to update inventory management. Since the delivery quantity (goods issue quantity) is the same as

Page 419: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 59

the order quantity, you can invoice these items using order-related billing, like service items. This means that you can invoice the customer for all the items in the sales document without any further processing. Create the new item category ZS## with description Consum. item ## by copying item category TAN. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sale Document Item → Define item categories → Select item category TAN → Choose "Copy as" Key: ZS## Description: Consumable item ## Configure the item category so that order-related billing is executed. De-activate the Credit Management functions. Relev. for billing field: B Relevant for order-related billing - status according to order quantity Credit active field: empty Configure the system so that it finds the new item category ZS## for materials in item category group NORM in the service order. Do not permit any other item categories. Note: Call up the details screen for the table entry. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Assign item categories → Choose "Position" Sales document type: ZS## Item category group: NORM Item usage: empty ItemCat-HgLevelItem: empty Default item category: ZS## (overwrite TAN) → Choose "Details"→ delete all other item categories

1-3-4 Which schedule line category does the system find for the material in your service order that controls the MRP indicator for material T-ATO## (plant: 1200)? Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Trading goods → Display → Enter material number → Select view(s) → Choose MRP 1 MRP type: VM

Page 420: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 60

IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Assign schedule line categories PropSchdLineCategory: CV What is the difference between schedule line category CV and category CN? IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Define schedule line categoriess Transfer of requirements and the availability check are de-activated for schedule line category CN. Change the schedule line category assignment so that the system finds schedule line category CN for consumable items such as T-ATO## (plant: 1200). IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Schedule lines → Assign schedule line categories Entry: ZS## VM CN All materials that contain MRP type VM in the material master are assigned to schedule line category CN. Also Entry: ZS## empty CN All materials that do not contain an MRP type in the material master are assigned to schedule line category CN.

1-3-6 De-activate the Picking-relevant indicator for item category ZS## in the delivery. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Shipping → Deliveries → Define item categories for deliveries → Select ZS## → Choose "Details" Relevant for picking field: empty

1-4 Copying control You need to configure your copying control so that you can create an order-related billing document for item category ZS## in sales document type ZS##. Note: go to Copying Controls for Billing Documents and choose Sales document ZS## → Billing document F2 and branch to item level. Copy the entry for item category TAD to item category ZS##. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Billing → Billing documents → Maintain copying control for billing documents

Page 421: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 61

→ Copying Control: Sales Document to Billing Document → Choose "Display -> Change" → Choose "Position": Billing type F2 from SalesDocType ZS## → Select entry → Choose "Item" → Select TAD → Choose "Copy as …" → Overwrite the Item category field with ZS##

1-5 Item: Service Configure your sales document type ZS## so that item category TAD Services is automatically assigned to items with services (materials from item category group DIEN). Do not permit any alternative item categories. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Sales Document Item → Assign item categories → Choose "Position" SaTy (sales document type): ZS## ItCGr (item category group): DIEN Use (item usage): empty HLevItCa (higher level item category): empty DfItC (default item category): TAD (overwrite TAX) → Select entry → Choose "Details"→ Delete all alternative item categories

1-6 Partner determination If you need a technician to carry out the repair, you need to record this information in the service order. The technician should then be informed automatically by mail when he is needed. Set up the necessary partner controls to allow this to happen. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Partner Determination

1-6-1 Define a new partner function GG with description PC technician ## (GG = ## +10). Choose the suitable partner type for this function. → Define partner functions → Choose "Partner functions" New entry → Function: GG (##+10) → Description: PC technician ## → Partner type: PE

Page 422: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 62

1-6-2 Define a new partner determination procedure ZS## with description Service procedure ZS## for sales documents and copy the following partner functions into this procedure: – SP Sold-to party – BP Bill-to party – PY Payer – SH Ship-to party – GG PC technician ## → Define and assign partner determination procedures → Select "Sales document header" → Choose "Partner procedures" New entry: Key: ZS## Description: Service procedure ## → Save → Select ZS## → Choose "Procedure details" → Maintain your entries Create all the partners as mandatory partners. Mandat. function field: Select for all partners

1-6-3 Assign procedure ZS## to your sales document type ZS##. → Define and assign parter determination procedure → Choose Sales Document Header → Select ZS## Procedure → Choose "Procedure assignment" → Change entry: Sales document type ZS## → Procedure ZS##

Page 423: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 63

1-7 Output The PC technician entered in your service order should automatically receive a mail telling him when he is needed. This output should be created when you save the sales order and appear automatically as mail in the employee's office inbox. IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Output → Output Determination → Output Proposal Using the Condition Technique

1-7-1 Create a relevant output type by copying the output type MAIL from the standard R/3 System with all its dependent entries. → Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents → Maintain output types → Choose "Change" → Select output type MAIL → Choose "Copy as" → Choose "Copy all" when prompted Key: ZM## Description: Go to customer ##

1-7-2 Maintain appropriate default values for the output master records for output type ZM##. Transm. medium: 7 Part. Function: GG Time: 4 → Select ZM## → Choose "Details"

1-7-3 Create the relevant mail data in the output type. → Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents → Maintain output types → Choose "Change" → Select output type ZM## → Choose "Mail message title" → Language: EN → Document title: Service Mail ## → Select entry → Choose "Mail texts" You have a repair order. Customer: &VBAK-KUNNR& Order: &VBAK-VBELN& Good luck!

Page 424: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 64

1-7-4 Assign the output type ZM## to partner function GG. → Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents → Assign output types to partner functions → Select MAIL → Choose "Copy as" → Output type: ZM## (overwrite) → Medium: 7 → Function: GG (overwrite)

1-7-5 Assign a suitable processing program to output type ZM## by copying the entry which controls output type MAIL. → Process Output and Forms → Assign forms and programs → Assign to sales documents → Select MAIL → Choose "Copy as" → Output type: ZM## (overwrite)

1-7-6 Change the output in output determination procedure V10000 for orders. Add step 60 + ## with condition type ZM## and activate requirement 2. → Maintain Output Determination for Sales Documents → Maintain output determination procedure → Select procedure V10000 → Choose "Control" → Choose "New entries" → Step: 60+## → Counter: 1 → CType: ZM## → Requirement: 2 How does this requirement affect the output? Requirement 2 means that output ZM## is only activated in the document once the document is complete. For example, if the PC technician has been defined as an mandatory partner, the output is only activated in the document if a valid personnel number has been assigned to partner function GG in the sales document.

Page 425: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 65

1-7-7 Create a master record for the new output. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Output → Sales document → Create → Output type: ZM## → Sales document type: ZS## Adopt the default values from the condition record. → Choose "Enter" (default values are copied from the master record)

1-7-8 When your PC technician receives the automatic mail about the customer visit, he should be able to go directly from the mail to the sales document so that he can obtain all the information he needs for the visit. To do this, save the relevant communication data in the master record for output type ZM##: Choose "Communication" Parameter: VBAK-VBELN (Sales document number) ID: AUN (Field in transaction that contains the document number) Transaction code: VA03 (Display sales document) Indicate that the output is an express mail. Select "Send express"

1-8 Text (optional) When you enter a service order, you want to be able to save specifications about the order as a text in the document (for example, equipment serial numbers, discounts, times, directions, telephone numbers). IMG → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Text Determination

1-8-1 Create a new text type for the sales document header: → Define text types → Select "Sales document header" → Choose "Text types" Text ID: ZS## Description: Visit info ##

1-8-2 Check which text determination procedure is used by your sales document type.

Page 426: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 66

→ Define and assign text determination procedures → Select "Sales document header" → Choose "Text procedure" Procedure: Procedure 01

1-8-3 Expand this procedure to include your new text type ZS##. → Select text procedure 01 → Choose "Texts in procedure" → Add new text type to end

1-8-4 Create a new text type for the sales document item: → Define text types → Select "Sales document item" → Choose "Text types" Text ID: ZS## Description: Repair text ##

1-8-5 Check which text determination procedure is used by item category TATX. → Define and assign text determination procedures → Select "Sales document item" → Choose "Text procedure" Text procedure: 01

1-8-6 Add the new item text ZS## to this procedure. → Select text procedure 01 → Choose "Texts in procedure" → Add your new text type to the end of the list

1-9 Customer master record Customer T-L63A## places an order for repairing computer equipment. Extend the customer master record with data from sales area 1000 14 00. Use the data created for sales area 1000 10 00 as your reference. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Business partners → Sold-to party → Create → Create

1-9-1 Extend the relevant customer master record: – Customer: T-L63A## – Sales area: 1000 14 00 – Reference customer: T-L63A##

Page 427: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 67

– Sales area: 1000 10 00

1-9-2 Check your company structure to see which delivering plants are permitted for sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 14. Enter a valid delivering plant in the customer master record for service processing. → Customer master record: Shipping view → F4 help on the "Delivering plant" field → Plant 1200 Or: IMG → Enterprise Structure → Maintain structure → Assignment → Sales and Distribution → Assign plant to sales organization and distribution channel → Only plant 1200 has been assigned to entry 1000 14

1-9-3 The PC technician brings all the materials he needs to repair the equipment with him and the journey is entered as a separate item in the order, so choose the Free house (FH) Incoterms in the customer master record. → Customer master record: Billing view → Incoterms: FH You have agreed on the following terms of payment with your customer for service orders: – Payment within 10 days: 2 % – Payment within 30 days: 1 % – Payment within 50 days: no discount → Payment terms: 0005 – Tax classification: 1 → Tax classific.: 1

Page 428: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 68

1-10 Material master record: Consumable item During the repair, the monitor has to be replaced (material T-ATO##). Change the material so that your service department (sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 14) can also use it. To do this, copy the values from the sales line 1000 10. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products Material → Trading goods → Create Material: T-ATO## Copy from material: T-ATO## Select views for Sales Org. Data 1 and Sales Org. Data 2 Organizational levels: Sales organization: 1000 Distribution channel: 14 Copy from organizational levels: Sales organization: 1000 Distribution channel: 10

1-11 Material master record: Service material T-ATP## is a service material. Change the material so that it can also be used by your service department (sales line 1000 14). Copy the values from sales line 1000 10, and change the item category group to DIEN. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Master data → Products → Material → Services → Create Material: T-ATP## Copy from material: T-ATP## → Copy data (see above) and change item category group to DIEN

Page 429: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 69

1-12 Service order Test your settings by processing a service order in the R/3 System. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Create Order type: ZS##

1-12-1 Enter a service order your customer T-L63A##. Enter sales area 1000 10 00. Does it work? No. Message: Order type ZS## has not been defined for sales area 1000 10 00. Why? In Customizing, you configured the document type so that it was only valid for sales area 1000 14 00.

1-12-2 Enter a service order for customer T-L63A## but do not enter a sales area. Customer: T-L63A## PO number: Service order ## Sales area: 1000 14 00 (determined when you choose "Enter") Can you enter a sales document number manually? No Why? External number assignment field was not activated for sales document type ZS##. What are the terms of delivery for the order? → Goto → Header → Billing or → Goto→ Overview → Sales → Incoterms:FH What are the terms of payment? → Payt terms: 0005

1-12-3 Enter a text item which documents the repair. In the Description field, enter the text "PC repairs".

Page 430: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 70

Optional: Maintain the repair text ## for the item by entering the number of the PC that needs to be repaired. → Select item → Choose "Details"→ Choose "Texts" tab page → Edit "Repair text ##" Optional: Maintain a route description at header level under text type Repair info ##. → Back → Choose "Hdr" → Choose "Texts" tab page → Edit text type "Visit info##"

1-12-4 Was output type ZM## automatically found for the document? → Extras → Output → Header No (no entry) Why? (You can use the condition analysis for the output to see why.) → Goto → Determin. analysis The document is still incomplete. This means that requirement 002 in the output determination procedure has not been met and output type ZM## has therefore not been processed.

1-12-5 Call up the incompletion log. Assign the employee with personnel number 1701## as the PC technician responsible for the order. → Back → Edit → Incompletion log → Complete data → Enter personnel number Note: The personnel master record for employee 1701## contains user ID Mayer-## in info category 105 "Communication".

1-12-6 Save the complete document. Check the processing status of output type ZM## in the document. → Sales document → Change → Extras → Output → Header → Green traffic light = successfully processed (OR → Select output → Choose "Further data")

1-12-7 Log on as user Mayer-## and password LO606. Call up the output, check the message and call up the document. → Office → Inbox → Choose "Office" → Select mail message

Page 431: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 71

→ Output contains customer and order number → Choose "Execute" → The system displays the document.

1-12-8 Once you have finished the repairs, you enter the service provided in the order. Your technician has installed a new monitor. Set the requested delivery date to one week from today's date. Enter the service and the materials used in the repair in the relevant service order. Replace the text item in the order with the service material. Material: T-ATP## (3 hours) Material: T-ATO## (1 piece) How does the system respond? → It determines a new item category for the text item. Not all the items or schedule lines in a sales document are needed in the delivery and billing documents. Which item and schedule line categories does the system find? Item 10: TAD / CD Item 20: ZS## / CN Check in Customizing which schedule lines from the sales document generate items in the delivery document. Why? Item 10: No, schedule line category is not relevant to delivery Item 20: Yes, schedule line category is relevant to delivery

Page 432: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 72

1-13 Delivery Deliver the order (shipping point: 1200). Set the selection date to a week's time. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Shipping → Delivery → Create → Selection date: today in a week

1-13-1 Which delivery item category does the system find for the consumable item? Delivery item category: ZS##

1-13-2 Post goods issue. Is picking necessary? No. Why? Picking was de-activated for this item category. Delivery number____________________________________________

1-14 Billing document Bill the order. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Billing → Billing document→ Create → Selection date:a week from today

1-14-1 What message do you receive? No billing documents have been created. Log: The sales document is blocked for billing.

1-14-2 Delete the billing block in the sales order. Logistics → Sales and distribution → Sales → Order → Change

1-14-3 Bill the order now (selection date a week from today). Do both items due for billing appear in the billing document? Yes

1-14-4 Is the data forwarded to Accounting?

Page 433: Scm605 en sales

(C) SAP AG SCM605 73

Logistics → Sales and distribution → Billing → Billing document → Change → Choose "Accounting" Yes

1-14-5 Call up the document flow in Billing. Can you see the delivery? → Environment → Document flow No

1-14-6 Call up the document flow from the sales order. Is the process completed as far as sales and distribution is concerned? Why? Yes. All the documents have status "completed". The accounting document is not cleared.